Sony Camcorder PMW 320K User Manual

4-198-307-11 (1)  
Solid-State Memory  
Camcorder  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly  
and retain it for future reference.  
PMW-320K  
PMW-320L  
© 2010 Sony Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
For the customers in Taiwan only  
For the customers in Canada  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
For the customers in Europe  
This product with the CE marking complies  
with the EMC Directive issued by the  
Commission of the European Community.  
Compliance with this directive implies  
conformity to the following European  
standards:  
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference  
(Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic  
Susceptibility (Immunity)  
This product is intended for use in the  
following Electromagnetic Environments: E1  
(residential), E2 (commercial and light  
industrial), E3 (urban outdoors), E4  
(controlled EMC environment, ex. TV  
studio).  
The manufacturer of this product is Sony  
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku,  
Tokyo, Japan.  
The Authorized Representative for EMC and  
product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH,  
Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart,  
Germany. For any service or guarantee  
matters please refer to the addresses given  
in separate service or guarantee documents.  
For the State of California, USA only  
Perchlorate Material - special handling may  
apply, See  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/  
perchlorate  
Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery  
contains perchlorate.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner (for a UHF Wireless Microphone  
System) ..................................................................................... 43  
Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of the Audio Inputs from the  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 Connectors............................................ 57  
Table of Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information (Status Screens)  
............................................................................................................... 62  
Starting to Record from Pre-stored Video (Picture Cache Function)  
.................................................................................................. 71  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Functions that can be assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 switches, the  
................................................................................................ 130  
Table of Contents  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Foreword  
Before Use  
After purchasing the PMW-320K/320L Solid-  
State Memory Camcorder, before operating, it is  
necessary to set the area of use.  
(Unless this setting is made, the camcorder will  
not operate.)  
For details of these settings, see “Setting the Area of  
Note  
Before attaching/removing optional components or  
accessories to/from the PMW-320K/320L (referred to as  
“the camcorder”), be sure to turn the power of the  
camcorder off.  
Foreword  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter1 Overview  
Multi-format support  
Features  
The camcorder supports interlace format  
recording (1080/59.94i or 1080/50i), progressive  
format recording (1080/29.97P, 1080/23.98P,  
720/59.94P, 720/29.97P, 720/23.98P, or 1080/  
25P, 720/50P, 720/25P), thus offering the  
flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording.  
(For 23.98P, native frequency recording is  
possible.)  
It also supports recording and playback of SD  
signals (both NTSC and PAL). The camcorder  
has an optional capability to record and play back  
SD signals in DVCAM-AVI format, and can  
output HD signals down-converted to SD.  
The camcorder is a shoulder-mount HD memory  
1
camcorder. It is provided with three / -type  
2
11  
(diagonal 8 mm (  
/
inches)) full-HD  
32  
(1920×1080) “Exmor” CMOS image sensors.  
1/2-type bayonet mount  
The camcorder is provided with a / -type  
bayonet mount (flange focal length 38 mm ( /  
inches), allowing you to use Sony / -type  
1
2
1
2
1
2
A special auto focus lens  
The camcorder is provided with the / -type auto  
bayonet mount exchangeable lenses.  
1
2
focus lens, which ensures high-quality shooting  
in all situations from wide angle to telephoto  
(PMW-320K only).  
S×S memory cards as recording media  
Using S×S memory cards, the camcorder offers  
nonlinear capabilities such as instant random  
access and file-based operation.  
A variety of functions for improved  
performance under various shooting  
conditions  
Light weight, low power consumption  
Design features such as CMOS image sensors,  
custom video signal processing ICs, and S×S  
memory card recording enable fanless operation  
and power consumption of 15 W or less. The  
camcorder’s light weight (3.2 kg (7 lb 0.88 oz))  
and low center of gravity make it easy to carry on  
the shoulder while ensuring superior stability.  
• Picture Cache function  
• Optical ND filters and electrical CC filters  
• Hyper gamma  
• Slow shutter function  
• Frame Recording function  
• Time lapse function (interval recording)  
• Slow & quick motion function  
• Freeze mix function  
• Focus magnification function  
• Image inversion function  
• Assignable switches  
HD recording using the “MPEG-2 Long  
GOP” codec  
The camcorder records 1920 × 1080, 1440 ×  
1080, and 1280 × 720 HD images using “MPEG-  
2 Long GOP” codec compression. It offers a  
choice of bit rates: either 35 Mbps (HQ mode) or  
25 Mbps (SP mode).  
• 3.5-inch high-resolution color LCD viewfinder  
• Remote control  
By utilizing an efficient compression format, the  
camcorder records high-quality HD images for  
long recording time of approx. 100 minutes at 35  
Mbps (HQ mode) or approx. 140 minutes at 25  
Mbps (SP mode) on a single 32-GB S×S memory  
card.  
Features  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Inherits unique features of XDCAM EX  
series  
Using the Software  
The camcorder inherits the workflow features of  
the XDCAM EX series, including thumbnail  
display and metadata management, and improves  
them by introducing an improved man-machine  
interface.  
The supplied CD-ROM (labeled “Utility  
Software for Solid-State Memory Camcorder and  
Recorder”) contains application and device driver  
software required to access to SxS memory cards  
from a computer and to manage material shot  
with the camcorder.  
XDCAM EX web sites  
For information on XDCAM EX, visit the  
following web sites:  
United States  
http://www.sony.com/xdcamex  
Information about how to install the software is  
provided in PDF format.  
Canada  
http://www.sony.ca/xdcamex  
Note  
You must install the SxS device driver on your computer  
if your computer is equipped with an ExpressCard slot  
and you want to use it to access SxS memory cards.  
Europe, Middle East, Africa, and Russia  
http://www.sonybiz.net/xdcamex  
Latin America  
http://www.sonypro-latin.com/xdcamex  
Reading the CD-ROM Manuals  
Preparations  
The following program must be installed on your  
computer in order to read the operation manuals  
contained on the CD-ROM.  
Australia  
http://www.sony.com.au/xdcamex  
Asia (except Korea, China, and Japan)  
http://pro.sony-asia.com  
Korea  
Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher  
http://bp.sony.co.kr/xdcamex  
China  
Memo  
http://pro.sony.com.cn/minisite/XDCAMEX  
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it  
from the following URL:  
http://www.adobe.com/  
Japan  
http://www.sony.co.jp/XDCAMEX  
Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe  
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
To read the documents  
Do the following:  
1
Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM  
drive.  
A cover page appears automatically in your  
browser.  
If it does not appear automatically in the  
browser, double-click on the index.htm file  
on the CD-ROM.  
2
Select and click on the manual that you  
wish to read.  
This opens the PDF file.  
Using the Software  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
For details, refer to the User’s Guide or ReadMe of  
the software.  
Memo  
The files may not be displayed properly, depending on  
the version of Adobe Reader. In such a case, install the  
latest version you can download from the URL  
mentioned in “Preparations” above.  
Uninstalling an application program  
Windows computer  
Note  
Choose “Start,” “Control Panel” then “Add or  
Remove Programs” and specify the program to be  
deleted.  
If you have lost or damaged the CD-ROM, you can  
purchase a new one to replace it. Contact a Sony service  
representative.  
Macintosh computer  
Drop the folder of the software into Trash.  
System Requirements for Using  
the Applications  
The following operating conditions are  
recommended for using the software recorded on  
the CD-ROM:  
S×S Device Driver Software  
Applicable hardware  
Computer conforming to ExpressCard/34 or  
ExpressCard/54  
OS  
• Microsoft Windows XP SP2 or later, Microsoft  
Windows Vista, Microsoft Windows 7  
• Mac OS X v10.4.9 or later, v10.5.0 or later,  
v10.6.0 or later  
For support information on the driver, refer to the  
following URL:  
http://www.sony.net/S×S-Support/  
Software Installation  
Do the following to install the software on the  
CD-ROM on your computer:  
1
Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM  
drive.  
A cover page appears automatically in your  
browser.  
If it does not appear automatically in the  
browser, double-click on the index.htm file  
on the CD-ROM.  
2
Select and click on the software that you  
wish to install.  
The installer for the software starts up.  
Follow the displayed instructions:  
Using the Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
   
d DC OUT 12V (DC power output)  
connector (4-pin, female)  
Locations and Functions  
of Parts and Controls  
Supplies power for an optional WRR-860A/861/  
862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner  
(maximum 0.5 A).  
Do not connect any equipment other than the  
UHF synthesized diversity tuner.  
Power Supply  
e Battery attachment shoe  
Attach a BP-GL95/GL65/L80S/L60S Battery  
Pack. Alternatively, you can attach an AC-  
DN2B/DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the  
camcorder on AC power supply.  
Note  
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the  
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the following  
battery packs: BP-GL95, BP-GL65, BP-L60S, and  
BP-L80S.  
Accessory Attachments  
a LIGHT switch  
Determines how a video light connected to the  
LIGHT connector (see page 14) is turned on and  
off.  
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video  
light is in the on position, the video light is  
turned on automatically while the camcorder  
is recording.  
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off  
manually, using its own switch.  
Note  
When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache  
mode, it is not possible to turn on the light before  
operation to start recording is carried out (or while data  
is being stored in memory).  
b POWER switch  
Turns the main power supply on and off.  
a Shoulder strap fitting  
Attach the supplied shoulder strap (see page 45).  
c DC IN (DC power input) connector  
(XLR type, 4-pin, male)  
To operate the camcorder from an AC power  
supply, connect an optional DC power cord to this  
terminal and then connect the cord to the DC  
output terminal of the BC-L70, BC-L160, or  
another battery charger.  
b Accessory fitting shoe  
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
c Viewfinder front-to-back positioning  
l LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin,  
lever  
female)  
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-to-  
back direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK  
knob. After adjustment, retighten this lever and  
the LOCK knob.  
A video light with a maximum power  
consumption of 50 W, such as the Anton Bauer  
Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected (see  
d Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring  
Loosen this ring to adjust the left-to-right position  
of the viewfinder (see page 34).  
m Lens cable clamp  
Clamp a lens cable.  
n MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V)  
e Viewfinder fitting shoe  
connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female)  
Attach the viewfinder.  
Connect a stereo microphone to this connector.  
The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.  
f VF (viewfinder) connector (26-pin,  
rectangular)  
o LENS connector (12-pin)  
Connect the cable of the supplied viewfinder.  
Connect a lens cable to this connector.  
1
This connector is not used for a / -inch lens  
2
g VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin,  
which is connected by a hot shoe inside the lens  
mount.  
round)  
Connect the cable of the optional DXF-51, DXF-  
C50W or DXF-20W viewfinder.  
Note  
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this  
connector, power off the camcorder first.  
For connecting the DXF-51 or DXF-C50W, optional  
parts are required. Consult a Sony service  
representative for information about connecting the  
DXF-51 or DXF-C50W.  
p Tripod mount  
When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the  
tripod adaptor (optional).  
h Lens mount securing rubber  
After locking the lens in position using the lens  
locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of the  
two projections. This fixes the lens mount,  
preventing it from coming loose.  
q Lens mount (special bayonet mount)  
Attach the lens.  
On the inner side of the lens mount is a 14-pin  
connector (two 7-pin connectors) for connecting  
the lens.  
i Viewfinder front-to-back positioning  
knob (LOCK knob)  
Loosen this knob to adjust the front-to-back  
position of the viewfinder (see page 34).  
Consult a Sony service representative for  
information about available lenses.  
Note  
The auto iris function is not available if the mounted lens  
has a 7-pin connector for connection to the camera.  
The video level indication and the iris position indication  
are also disabled.  
j Fitting for optional microphone holder  
Fit an optional CAC-12 Microphone Holder (see  
k Shoulder pad  
r Lens locking lever  
Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the  
position in the front-to-rear direction. Adjust the  
position for maximum convenience when  
operating the camcorder on your shoulder (see  
After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate  
the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens  
in position.  
After locking the lens, be sure to use the lens  
mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from  
becoming detached.  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
s Lens mount cap  
FILTERselector ND filter  
setting  
Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever.  
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for  
protection from dust.  
1
2
3
4
/
ND (attenuates light to  
1
4
approximately / )  
4
1
/
ND (attenuates light to  
1
16  
Operating and Connectors Section  
Front  
approximately  
1
/
)
16  
/
ND (attenuates light to  
1
64  
approximately  
/
)
64  
You can change a MAINTENANCE menu  
setting so that different white balance settings can  
be stored for different FILTER selector positions.  
This allows you to automatically obtain optimum  
white balance for the current shooting conditions  
in linkage with the filter selection.  
d MENU knob  
Changes the item selection or a setting within the  
menu (see page 91).  
e AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/  
black balance adjustment) switch  
Activates the automatic white/black balance  
adjustment functions.  
WHITE: Adjust the white balance automatically.  
If the WHITE BAL switch (see page 17) is  
set to A or B, the white balance setting is  
stored in the corresponding memory. If the  
WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the  
automatic white balance adjustment function  
does not operate.  
BLACK: Adjust the black set and black balance  
automatically.  
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even  
when the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)  
function is operating.  
a REC START (recording start) button  
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop  
recording. The effect is the same as that of the  
REC button on the lens.  
b SHUTTER selector  
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push to  
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter  
mode setting. When this switch is operated, the  
new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for  
about three seconds.  
If you push the switch to the WHITE side once  
more during the automatic white balance  
adjustment, the adjustment is cancelled and the  
white balance setting returns to the original  
setting.  
If you push the switch to the BLACK side once  
more during the automatic black balance  
adjustment, the adjustment is cancelled and the  
black balance setting returns to the original  
setting.  
c FILTER selector  
Switches between four ND filters built into this  
camcorder.  
When this selector is used, the new setting  
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three  
seconds.  
FILTER selector ND filter  
setting  
1
CLEAR  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
f MIC (microphone) LEVEL control  
c ALARM (alarm tone volume  
adjustment) knob  
Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1, 2, 3  
and 4 (see page 57).  
Controls the volume of the warning tone that is  
output via the built-in speaker or optional  
earphones. When the knob is turned to the  
minimum position, no sound can be heard.  
However, if MAINTENANCE >Audio >Min  
Alarm Volume in the setup menu is set to [Set],  
the alarm tone is audible even when this volume  
control is at the minimum position.  
Right side (near the front)  
ALARM  
Minimum  
Maximum  
d MONITOR (monitor volume  
adjustment) knob  
Controls the volume of the sound other than the  
warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker  
or earphones. When the knob is turned to the  
minimum position, no sound can be heard.  
e MONITOR (audio monitor selection)  
switches  
By means of combinations of the two switches,  
you can select audio that you want to hear through  
the built-in speaker or earphones.  
Position of down-side switch: CH-1/2  
Position of up-side Audio output  
switch  
CH-1/CH-3  
MIX  
Channel 1 audio  
a ASSIGN. (assignable) 1/2/3 switches  
Channels 1 and 2 mixed  
You can assign the desired functions to these  
switches on OPERATION >Assignable SW in  
the setup menu (see page 129).  
a)  
audio (stereo)  
CH-2/CH-4  
Channel 2 audio  
EZ Mode is assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 switch,  
and Off is assigned to the ASSIGN. 2/3 switches  
as the factory default setting.  
The ASSIGN.1/3 switches are provided with an  
indicator to show whether a function is assigned  
to the switch (ON) or not (OFF).  
Position of down-side switch: CH-3/4  
Position of up-side Audio output  
switch  
CH-1/CH-3  
MIX  
Channel 3 audio  
Channels 3 and 4 mixed  
a)  
audio (stereo)  
CH-2/CH-4  
Channel 4 audio  
b COLOR TEMP. (color temperature)  
button  
a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE  
jack, you can hear the audio in stereo. (Under  
MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu,  
Headphone Out must be set to STEREO.)  
Press to light the button and change the color  
temperature for shooting (factory default setting).  
You can use this as an assignable switch (see  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
settings in memory A or memory B.  
f ASSIGN. (assignable) 0 switch  
You can assign the desired function to this switch  
on OPERATION >Assignable SW in the setup  
Off is assigned to this switch when the camcorder  
is shipped from the factory.  
1)  
B (ATW ): When this switch is set to B and  
OPERATION >White Setting >White  
Switch<B> is set to [ATW] in the setup  
menu, ATW is activated.  
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch  
even when ATW is in use.  
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting  
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three  
seconds.  
This is a momentary type switch. Each press of  
the switch turns the function assigned to this  
switch on or off.  
g GAIN selector  
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white  
balance of the picture being shot is adjusted  
automatically for varying lighting conditions.  
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match  
the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains  
corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be  
selected on OPERATION >Gain Switch in the  
setup menu (see page 102). (The factory settings  
are L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB.)  
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting  
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three  
seconds.  
j MENU ON/OFF switch  
To use this switch, open the cover.  
This switch is used to display the menu on the  
viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. Each  
time the switch is pushed down, the menu screen  
is turned on and off.  
The function of this switch is the same as that of  
the MENU button in the thumbnail screen  
operations section.  
h OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic  
contrast control) switch  
Switches the video signal output from the camera  
module, between the following two.  
k STATUS ON/SEL/OFF (menu display  
BARS: Output the color bar signal.  
on/page selection/display off) switch  
CAM: Output the video signal being shot. When  
1)  
MENU CANCEL/PRST (preset) /  
ESCAPE switch  
this is selected, you can switch DCC on and  
off.  
When the menu is not displayed, this switch  
functions as the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch.  
When the menu is displayed, the switch functions  
as the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch.  
(To use the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE  
switch, open the cover.)  
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very  
bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the  
subject, objects in the background will be lost in the  
glare. The DCC function will suppress the high  
intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is  
particularly effective in the following cases.  
• Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day  
• Shooting a subject indoors, against a background  
through a window  
Use the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch in the  
following way.  
• Any high contrast scene  
ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed  
upward, a window to confirm the menu  
settings and status of the camcorder appears  
on the viewfinder screen (see page 62). The  
window consists of five pages, which are  
switched each time the switch is pushed  
upward. Each page is displayed for about 10  
seconds.  
i WHITE BAL (white balance memory)  
switch  
Controls adjustment of the white balance.  
PRST: Adjust the color temperature to the preset  
value (the factory default setting: 3200K).  
Use this setting when you have no time to  
adjust the white balance.  
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment  
settings already stored in A or B. Push the  
AUTO W/B BAL switch (see page 15) on  
the WHITE side, to automatically adjust the  
white balance, and save the adjustment  
OFF: To clear the page immediately after  
display, push this switch down to the OFF  
position.  
Use the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE in the  
following way.  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this  
position after a setting is changed in the setup  
menu displays the message to confirm  
whether the previous settings are cancelled.  
Pushing this switch up to this position again  
cancels the previous settings.  
Right side (near the rear)  
Pushing this switch up to this position before  
a setting is changed in the setup menu or after  
a setting change is cancelled in the setup  
menu displays the message to confirm  
whether the setting is reset to the initial  
value.  
Pushing this switch up to this position again  
resets the settings to the initial value.  
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page,  
which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.  
Each time the switch is pushed to this  
position, the page returns to one stage higher  
in the hierarchy.  
l Cover  
Open this cover to use the MENU ON/OFF  
switch or the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE  
switch.  
a Built-in speaker  
1)  
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E sound  
during recording, and playback sound during  
playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to  
reinforce visual warnings (see page 147).  
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE  
jack, the speaker output is suppressed  
automatically.  
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric”. In E-E  
mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder  
are output after passing through internal electric  
circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.  
b Monochrome LCD panel  
Displays remaining battery capacity, remaining  
media capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
clip (or the first frame of the current clip when no  
preceding clips exist).  
c WARNING indicator  
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs  
k STOP button  
Press this button to stop playback.  
d ACCESS lamp  
Lights up when data is written to or read from the  
recording media.  
l NEXT button  
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.  
If you press this together with the F FWD button,  
the jump is to the first frame of the last recorded  
clip on the recording media.  
e Protection cover of the audio control  
section  
Open to access the audio control section (see  
m EXPAND (expand function) button  
If you press this button when the thumbnail  
screen is displayed, the duration of the selected  
clip is divided into fractions, and the first frame of  
each of the divisions is shown in a further  
thumbnail display (expand function). For an HD  
recorded MP4 clip, its duration is divided into 12.  
If an SD recorded AVI clip comprises multiple  
files, the divisions are displayed for the individual  
files.  
For MP4 clips, each time you press this button the  
division is repeated. Hold down the SHIFT button  
and press this button to step back through the  
division process.  
f Protection cover of the thumbnail  
screen operations section  
Open to access the thumbnail screen operations  
section (see page 20).  
g F REV (fast reverse) button and  
indicator  
This plays back at high speed in the reverse  
direction. The playback speed changes in the  
order ×4 t ×15 t ×24 with each press of the  
button. The indicator lights during high-speed  
playback in the reverse direction.  
h PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator  
n HOLD (display hold) button  
Press this button to view play back video images  
using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor.  
The indicator lights during playback.  
Press this button again during playback to pause,  
outputting a still image. At this time the indicator  
flashes at a rate of once per second.  
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data  
displayed in the monochrome LCD panel. (The  
timecode generator continues running.) Pressing  
this button again releases the hold.  
For details of the counter display, see page 24.  
Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during  
playback or pause starts high speed playback in  
the forward or reverse direction.  
o RESET/RETURN button  
Resets the value shown in the time counter  
display in the monochrome LCD panel.  
According to the settings of the PRESET/  
REGEN/CLOCK switch (see page 21) and the  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (see page 20), this  
button resets the display as follows.  
i F FWD (fast forward) button and  
indicator  
This plays back at high speed in the forward  
direction. The playback speed changes in the  
order ×4 t ×15 t ×24 with each press of the  
button. The indicator lights during high-speed  
playback in the forward direction.  
Settings of switches To reset  
DISPLAY switch:  
COUNTER  
Counter to 0:00:00:00  
DISPLAY switch:  
TC  
PRESET/REGEN/  
CLOCK switch:  
PRESET  
Timecode to 00:00:00:00  
j PREV button  
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.  
If you press this together with the F REV button,  
the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded  
clip on the recording media.  
If you press this button twice in rapid succession,  
the jump is to the first frame of the last preceding  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN  
switch: SET  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
                       
Thumbnail screen operations section and audio  
control section  
Settings of switches To reset  
a)  
DISPLAY switch:  
U-BIT  
User bits data to 00 00 00  
00  
PRESET/REGEN/  
CLOCK switch:  
PRESET  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN  
switch: SET  
a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the  
media, those bits which can be used to record useful  
information for the user such as scene number,  
shooting place, etc.  
This button returns to the previous screen when  
pressed during thumbnail screen display, expand  
thumbnail screen display, or shot mark thumbnail  
screen display.  
a THUMBNAIL indicator  
This lights when thumbnail screen is displayed.  
b THUMBNAIL button  
p DISPLAY switch  
Press this button to display the thumbnail screen  
(see page 78) and to carry out a thumbnail  
operation.  
This cycles the data displayed in the time counter  
display in the monochrome LCD panel through  
the sequence COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT (see  
Press once more to return to the original display.  
COUNTER: Display the elapsed recording/  
playback time (hours, minutes, seconds,  
frames).  
TC: Display timecode.  
U-BIT: Display user bits data.  
c SET (set) button and arrow buttons  
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit  
settings, and for thumbnail screen operations (see  
When the menu is displayed, press this button to  
select an item or to confirm the setting change.  
q BACKLIGHT button  
Turns the backlight of the monochrome LCD on  
and off. The backlight of the monochrome LCD  
panel will be turned on when the camcorder is  
powered on for the first time after shipped from  
the factory.  
d MENU button  
Each press of this button turns the setup menu  
display on and off.  
The function of this button is the same as that of  
the MENU ON/OFF switch.  
e F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/  
recording run) switch  
Selects the operating mode of the internal  
timecode generator. The operating mode is set as  
explained below, depending on the position of the  
switch.  
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless  
of whether the camcorder is recording. Use  
this setting when synchronizing the timecode  
with external timecode.  
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.  
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during  
recording. Use this setting to have a  
consecutive timecode on the recording  
media.  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
k AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 (audio  
channel 1/2 adjustment method  
selection) switches  
Select the audio level adjustment method for each  
of audio channels 1 and 2.  
f LEVEL CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 (audio  
channel 1/2/3/4 recording level) knobs  
Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on channels  
1, 2, 3, and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/  
CH-2 and AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switches are  
set to MANUAL.  
AUTO: Automatic adjustment  
MANUAL: Manual adjustment  
l AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio  
channel 1/2/3/4 input selection) switches  
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on  
audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4.  
FRONT: Audio input signals from the  
microphone connected to the MIC IN  
connector  
REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
connectors  
g AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 (audio  
channel 3/4 adjustment method  
selection) switch  
Select the audio level adjustment method for each  
of audio channels 3 and 4.  
AUTO: Automatic adjustment  
MANUAL: Manual adjustment  
h ESSENCE MARK button  
WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF  
portable tuner if it is installed  
By pressing this button when the thumbnail  
display of a clip is on the screen, you can view the  
following thumbnail display of the shot-marked  
frames of that clip, depending on the item  
selected in a list displayed on the screen.  
Shot Mark1: Thumbnail display of the frames  
marked with Shot Mark 1  
Shot Mark2: Thumbnail display of the frames  
marked with Shot Mark 2  
Shot Mark: Thumbnail display of the frames  
marked with either Shot Mark 1 or Shot Mark  
2
i SHIFT button  
Use this in combination with other buttons.  
j PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/  
CLOCK switch  
Selects the type of timecode to record.  
PRESET: Record new timecode on the media.  
REGEN: Record timecode continuous with the  
existing timecode recorded on the media.  
Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/  
R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-  
RUN mode.  
CLOCK: Record timecode synchronized to the  
internal clock. Regardless of the setting of  
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the  
camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
b USB connector  
Left side and upper section  
Used to put this camcorder into USB connection  
mode and use it as an external storage device for  
a computer. When a computer without  
ExpressCard slot is connected to this connector,  
every memory card inserted in the camcorder is  
recognized as a drive for that computer.  
c S×S memory card slots  
These two slots (A and B) can receive S×S  
memory cards or other recording media (see  
d ACCESS lamps  
Indicate the state of slots A and B (see page 65).  
You can check whether the lamps are lit even  
when the slot cover is closed.  
e EJECT buttons  
To remove the recording media from the slot,  
press the EJECT button to release the lock, then  
press the button once more. This makes the media  
come out of the slot partially (see page 66).  
f Slot cover  
Slide to the left and right to open and close.  
g SLOT SELECT (S×S memory card  
select) button  
When S×S memory cards are loaded in both card  
slots A and B, press this button to select the card  
you want to use (see page 66).  
h HDMI output connector  
Outputs HDMI signals for video monitoring.  
When a video monitor provided with an HDMI  
signal input connector is connected to this  
connector, you can monitor picture being shot  
(camera picture) or playback picture.  
i GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)  
a ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches  
connector (BNC type)  
You can assign the desired functions to these  
switches on OPERATION >Assignable SW in  
the setup menu (see page 130).  
Off is assigned to these switches when the  
camcorder is shipped from the factory.  
This connector inputs a reference signal when the  
camcorder is to be genlocked or when timecode is  
to be synchronized with external equipment.  
Available reference signals vary depending on the  
current system frequency as shown in the  
following table.  
System frequency Available reference signals  
1080/59.94i  
1080/29.97P  
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i  
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
System frequency Available reference signals  
Rear  
1080/23.98P (PsF  
output)  
1080/23.98PsF, 480/59.94i  
1080/23.98P  
(Pulldown output)  
720/59.94P  
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i  
1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,  
480/59.94i  
720/29.97P  
720/23.98P  
1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,  
480/59.94i  
1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,  
480/59.94i  
480/59.94i  
480/29.97P  
1080/50i  
1080/25P  
720/50P  
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i  
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i  
1080/50i, 576/50i  
1080/50i, 576/50i  
1080/50i, 720/50P, 576/50i  
1080/50i, 720/50P, 576/50i  
1080/50i, 576/50i  
720/25P  
576/50i  
576/25P  
1080/50i, 576/50i  
(Genlock for the camera module supports  
horizontal sync signals only.) Use  
MAINTENANCE >GENLOCK in the setup  
menu to adjust the genlock H-phase (phase of  
horizontal sync signal).  
j TC IN (timecode input) connector  
(BNC type)  
To apply an external lock to the timecode of the  
camcorder, input the reference timecode.  
a TALLY (back tally) indicators (red)  
Light up during recording. They will not light if  
the TALLY switch is set to OFF. These indicators  
also flash to indicate warnings (see page 19). The  
tally indicator on the front of the viewfinder and  
the REC indication on the viewfinder screen light  
or flash in the same manner.  
k VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)  
Outputs video signals for monitoring. The output  
signals can be selected either composite video or  
HD-Y depending on the setting of OPERATION  
>Input/Output >Output&i.LINK in the setup  
menu.  
b TALLY switch  
l TC OUT (timecode output) connector  
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator  
function.  
(BNC type)  
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the  
timecode of this camcorder, connect this  
connector to the external VTR’s timecode input  
connector.  
c EARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack)  
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording  
and playback sound during playback. When an  
alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound  
through the earphone. Plugging an earphone into  
the jack automatically cuts off the built-in  
speaker.  
You can select monaural or stereo on  
MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu.  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
d AUDIO IN selectors  
Select the audio source you connect to the  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.  
Monochrome LCD Panel  
LINE: When connecting a stereo amplifier or  
other external audio signal source  
MIC: When connecting a microphone that does  
not require 48 V power supply  
+48V: When connecting a microphone that  
requires 48 V power supply  
e HD/SD SDI OUT connector (BNC type)  
Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with  
embedded audio). The output from this connector  
can be turned on and off with OPERATION  
>Input/Output >SDI Output in the setup menu.  
a Timecode status  
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is  
selected.  
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode  
generator is locked to an external signal input  
to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.  
f AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1  
and channel 2 input) connectors (XLR  
type, 3-pin, female)  
These are audio input connectors for channels 1  
and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment  
or a microphone.  
b Counter display mode  
Shows the type of information selected by the  
DISPLAY switch to be displayed in the time  
counter display.  
COUNTER: Counter values  
TC: Timecode  
g Bottom cover  
This is provided for protecting the cables  
connected to the connectors on the rear panel.  
By loosening the screws which retain the cover to  
the bottom of the camcorder, you can adjust the  
position of the cover depending on the size and  
shape of the microphone or audio cable plugs.  
After adjusting the position, tighten the screws to  
secure the cover.  
U-BIT: User bits data  
c Time counter display  
Switches displays of time counter values,  
timecode, and user bits data, depending on the  
position of the DISPLAY switch.  
When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the  
timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the  
format shown below. When the HOLD button is  
pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is  
displayed in the normal format.  
h AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-  
pin, male)  
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio  
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The  
audio signals are selected by the MONITOR  
switch.  
The three dots indicates that timecode is  
displayed in the hold mode.  
i REMOTE connector (8-pin)  
Connect a remote control unit, which makes it  
possible to control the camcorder remotely.  
d HOLD indication  
Appears when the timecode generator output is  
displayed in the hold mode.  
Note  
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control  
Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the  
camcorder POWER switch.  
e Audio level indicators  
Indicate the audio recording or playback levels of  
channels 1 to 4.  
j i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector (6-pin,  
IEEE1394 compliant, S400)  
To input and output HDV/DV streams, connect to  
an HDV/DV device.  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
When the button is pressed, the auto focus  
operates until the image is in focus, then  
disengages.  
f Lock icon  
Appears when the recording media is write-  
protected.  
Even when the FOCUS switch is set to A (auto),  
by pressing this button, you can restart the auto  
focus.  
g Remaining media capacity indicator  
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining  
capacity of recording media in the slots.  
b FOCUS switch  
h Remaining battery capacity indicator  
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining  
battery capacity.  
A (auto): The auto focus function is constantly  
active. Even with the switch in the A  
position, you can manually adjust the focus  
by operating the focus ring.  
M (manual): The manual mode allows focusing  
adjustment with the focus ring.  
In manual mode, auto focus adjustment is also  
possible, by pressing the PUSH AF button.  
Auto Focus Lens (Supplied with  
the PMW-320K)  
c MACRO switch  
When this switch is in the ON position, the macro  
mode is enabled, allowing focusing over the  
1)  
whole range (5 cm to ) including the macro  
1)  
range (from 5 cm to 90 cm from the front of the  
lens).  
This operation is independent of whether the  
focus adjustment mode is auto or manual.  
In the macro range, the auto focusing speed is  
lower.  
1) At the wide-angle setting  
d Iris ring  
For manual iris adjustment, set the IRIS switch to  
the M (manual) position, then turn this ring.  
e Zoom ring  
For manual zoom adjustment, set the ZOOM  
switch to the MANUAL position, then turn this  
ring.  
f Focus ring  
Turn this ring to adjust the focus.  
This ring can be turned endlessly in both  
directions. The faster you turn, the faster the  
focusing mechanism operates, to minimize the  
amount of turning required for focusing.  
When you slide the focus ring back (toward the  
camcorder), the focus mode becomes Full MF  
a PUSH AF (auto focus) button  
When the focus adjustment is in the manual  
mode, by pressing this button you can use the auto  
focus for an instantaneous adjustment to the  
subject.  
g Flange focal length adjustment button  
Press this to adjust the flange focal length (the  
distance from the lens mounting flange plane to  
the focusing plane) (see page 40).  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Note on zoom speed  
h Zoom control connector (8-pin)  
Depending on the shooting distance, the zoom  
speed may fall as the lens approaches the  
telephoto end.  
Connecting an optional zoom servo controller  
allows remote control of zooming.  
i ZOOM switch  
SERVO: Motorized zoom. Operate the zoom  
with the power zoom lever.  
MANU. (manual): Manual zoom. Operate the  
zoom with the zoom ring.  
m RET (return video) button  
You can use this as an assignable switch (see  
Use this to check the video when Lens RET is  
assigned to this button (factory default setting). If  
you press this during recording pause, the last few  
seconds recorded appear on the viewfinder screen  
(recording review) (see page 69).  
Pressing this button (single click) during  
recording or playback records a Shot Mark 1  
mark, and double-clicking records a Shot Mark 2  
mark (see page 71).  
j PUSH AUTO button  
When the IRIS switch is in the M position for  
manual adjustment, press this button for an  
instantaneous auto adjustment.  
The iris is automatically adjusted while the button  
is held down.  
k IRIS switch  
A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically.  
n VTR button  
Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to  
start recording, then press once more to stop.  
M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring.  
l Power zoom lever  
This is enabled when the ZOOM switch is in the  
SERVO position. Press the W end for wide-angle  
and the T end for telephoto.  
Viewfinder  
Press the lever harder for a faster zoom action.  
Notes on auto focus  
• In the following cases, it may be difficult to  
focus on the subject. If this does happen, use  
manual focusing.  
- If the subject has no contrast  
- If the subject is moving rapidly  
- When shooting point light sources, under  
street lighting or at night  
- When there are very bright objects close to the  
subject  
- When shooting through a glass window  
• If there are a number of objects within the  
screen at close and far range, the focus may not  
be on the intended subject. In this case, with the  
subject on which you want to focus in the center  
of the screen, press the PUSH AF button.  
• After focusing with the PUSH AF button, if you  
operate the zoom or adjust the iris, the depth of  
field may become shallower, losing crisp focus.  
In such cases, press the PUSH AF button once  
more.  
• If you focus at wide-angle then zoom to  
telephoto, the subject may no longer be in focus.  
• It may take time until the image is in focus  
while using the slow shutter mode.  
a Plug  
Connect to the VF connector (rectangular) on the  
camcorder.  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
OFF: Do not display a zebra pattern.  
b Stopper  
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the  
camcorder when it is slid from side to side.  
m DISPLAY switch  
Turns the display of text information on and off.  
ON: Display text information.  
c Eyecup  
OFF: Do not display text information.  
d Diopter adjustment ring  
n MIRROR switch  
Allows for optimal focus adjustment.  
The image display on the monitor screen becomes  
reversed horizontally or vertically when the  
viewfinder barrel is raised up or rotated. Use this  
switch to control the image display in such  
situation.  
L/R: Reverse the image horizontally.  
OFF: Do not reverse the image.  
B/T: Reverse the image vertically.  
e Eyepiece  
You can raise this up when required by the  
situation.  
f Viewfinder barrel  
You can raise this up or rotate when required by  
the situation.  
g Tally indicator  
o Viewfinder cable  
Lights up when recording is started by a press of  
the REC START button on this camcorder, the  
VTR button on the lens, or the VTR button on the  
remote control unit.  
p Microphone holder  
When an abnormality occurs, the tally indicator  
flashes to indicate a warning.  
h PEAKING control  
Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture  
sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This  
control has no effect on the output signals of the  
camcorder.  
i CONTRAST control  
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control  
has no effect on the output signals of the  
camcorder.  
j BRIGHT control  
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control  
has no effect on the output signals of the  
camcorder.  
k TALLY switch  
Controls the tally indicator located on the front of  
the viewfinder.  
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to  
high.  
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.  
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.  
l ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch  
Controls the zebra pattern display on the  
viewfinder screen as follows.  
ON: Display a zebra pattern.  
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Ex2D: The lens extender and the optional digital  
extender function of this camcorder are both  
on.  
Viewfinder Screen  
Display  
b Zoom position (when the serial lens is  
mounted)  
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video  
picture but also characters and messages  
indicating the camcorder settings and operating  
status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc.  
When the menu screen is not displayed and the  
DISPLAY switch is set to ON, the items for  
which an ON setting was made with  
Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in  
the range from 0 to 99.  
c Focus position (when the serial lens is  
mounted)  
Indicates the focus position as distance to the  
subject (in units of m).  
OPERATION >Super Impose in the setup menu  
or with related switches are displayed at the top  
and bottom of the screen.  
Caution messages are indicated for three seconds  
when you carry out operations to change  
camcorder settings. Adjustment execution  
messages are indicated while adjustments  
proceed. When adjustments are finished,  
messages showing the results of adjustments  
appear for three seconds.  
d Green tally  
Lights when the camcorder is the following  
states.  
• MAINTENANCE >Camera Config >HD-SDI  
Remote I/F is set to [G-Tally] in the setup menu  
and a recording control signal is output from the  
HD/SD SDI OUT connector.  
• When the Picture Cache mode is enabled  
Not only these indications are displayed on the  
viewfinder screen, but a menu setting enables  
them to be output as video signals.  
e Media status  
Displays the name of the currently active media  
slot (A or B).  
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder  
screen are shown below.  
f Recording mode/operation status  
Indicates the current recording mode/operation  
status as follows.  
Top of viewfinder screen  
Indication  
zREC  
Meaning  
Recording in progress  
Standby for recording  
Standby in Picture Cache mode  
STBY  
zCACHE  
zINT REC Recording in progress in Interval  
Recording mode  
zINT STBY Standby for next recording in  
Interval Recording mode  
INT STBY  
Standby in Interval Recording  
mode  
zFRM REC Recording in progress in Frame  
Recording mode  
zFRM  
STBY  
Standby for next recording in  
Frame Recording mode  
a Extender settings  
FRM STBY Standby in Frame Recording mode  
zS&Q REC Recording in progress in Slow &  
Quick Motion mode  
Indicates the setting of the digital extender  
function (by digital extender option) of this  
camcorder and the setting of the lens extender.  
EX: The lens extender is on.  
08: The lens shrinker is on.  
x2D: The optional digital extender function of  
this camcorder is on.  
S&Q STBY Standby in Slow & Quick Motion  
mode  
zCALL  
Being called from a connected  
device  
BREVIEW During recording review  
Viewfinder Screen Display  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
g Wireless receiver reception level  
m Depth of field indication (when the  
serial lens is mounted)  
When a wireless receiver is installed in the  
camcorder, “W” appears together with four  
segment reception level indicators for each of the  
channels (1 to 4) that can be used by the receiver.  
The indications are as follows.  
In normal situation: The number of white  
segments indicates the strength of the signal  
level.  
Error/warning indication  
A bar indicates the depth of field. The display unit  
is meters or feet, as selected by OPERATION  
>Display On/Off >Lens Info in the setup menu.  
An error or warning message is displayed here  
depending on the situation.  
n Special recording mode indication  
The following is displayed when the camcorder is  
in a special recording mode.  
• Frame Rec (Frame Recording mode)  
• Interval Rec (Interval Recording mode)  
• S&Q Motion (Slow & Quick Motion mode)  
Muting (for an analog receiver) or error rate  
aggravation (for a digital receiver): The  
number of gray segments indicates the  
strength of the signal level.  
h Battery remaining/voltage capacity  
The following is displayed depending on the type  
of power source.  
o Special recording mode settings  
indication  
Appears when the camcorder is in a special  
recording mode.  
Type of power What is displayed  
source  
InfoLithium  
battery  
Remaining battery capacity icon  
and remaining recording time  
Remaining battery capacity (%  
indication)  
Bottom of viewfinder screen  
Anton Bauer  
battery  
Other type than Input voltage  
above  
i External power input  
Appears when power is supplied from an external  
power source connected to the DC IN connector.  
j Color temperature  
Displays a color temperature calculated from the  
gain of R and B, in the range 1.5 K to 50.0 K (in  
steps of 0.1 K). The +/– signs may be displayed  
depending on the Offset White setting (see  
No display: Offset White is OFF  
+: The value of Offset White is greater than  
3200K.  
a TLCS iris control mode  
The following icons are displayed to indicate the  
video level control modes based on the Total  
Level Control System (TLCS).  
–: The value of Offset White is less than 3200K.  
k Number of system lines  
Icon  
TLCS control mode  
Indicates the number of system lines (1080/720/  
576/480) of video currently being recorded or  
played back.  
Backlight mode  
Standard mode  
Spotlight mode  
STD  
l Video format  
Indicates the format of video being currently  
played back or recorded (see page 47).  
The video aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3) can also be  
displayed when the recording format is set to  
DVCAM.  
b Focus adjustment mode (when the auto  
focus lens is mounted)  
Indicates the current focus adjustment mode of  
the camcorder.  
Viewfinder Screen Display  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
• AF (Auto Focus mode)  
k Filter position  
• MF (Manual Focus mode)  
• MF* (Manual Focus mode when the MF Assist  
function is on)  
Indicates the currently selected ND filter position  
number. (see page 15).  
When ELECTRICAL CC is assigned to an  
assignable switch, the electrical filter position (A/  
B/C/D) appears to the right of the ND filter  
position (1 to 4), as shown on the previous page.  
• Full MF (Full Manual Focus mode)  
c External device control  
“REC2” is displayed when MAINTENANCE  
>Camera Config >HD-SDI Remote I/F is set to  
[Chara] in the setup menu and a recording control  
signal is output from the HD/SD SDI OUT  
connector.  
l White balance memory  
Indicates the currently selected white balance  
automatic adjustment memory.  
ATW: ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) mode  
W:A: Memory A mode  
W:B: Memory B mode  
d Operation status of connected i.LINK  
device  
W:P: Preset mode  
The operating format (HDV or DV) and operation  
status of that device are indicated as follows.  
3200: When the assignable switch to which Color  
Temp SW 3200K has been assigned is on  
4300: When the assignable switch to which Color  
Temp SW 4300K has been assigned is on  
5600: When the assignable switch to which Color  
Temp SW 5600K has been assigned is on  
6300: When the assignable switch to which Color  
Temp SW 6300K has been assigned is on  
Indication  
zREC  
STBY  
Meaning  
HDV recording in progress  
Standby for HDV recording  
DV recording in progress  
Standby for DV recording  
zREC  
STBY  
e Video level indication  
m Gain value  
Indicates the gain value (in dB) of the video  
amplifier, as set by the GAIN selector.  
An indication is displayed together with an  
appropriate ND filter position number when the  
light level of the subject is too high or too low.  
n Shutter  
Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.  
f Timecode  
Caution message  
Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time,  
timecode, user bits data or other information  
selected by the DISPLAY switch (see page 20).  
Also indicates a caution message when caution is  
required such as when you try to change settings.  
o Audio level meters  
Indicate the audio levels of channel 1 and channel  
2.  
g Brightness level  
Indicates the average brightness level (%) of the  
detection area.  
p Remaining media capacity  
Indicates the recording time remaining for each of  
the media loaded in the slots. The available time  
for recording with the current video format  
(recording bit rate) is calculated according to the  
remaining space of each media and indicated in  
time units of minutes. A lock icon appears if the  
media is write-protected.  
h External input source  
Indicates the type of external input signal (HDV)  
to be recorded.  
i Recording of external input  
Indicates “EXT” when an external input is  
recorded.  
q Histogram  
Shows a pixel distribution of video luminance  
(HD mode only).  
j Electric color temperature filter  
Appears when the CC 5600K function is set to on.  
Viewfinder Screen Display  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
r Iris position (when the lens is mounted)  
Indicates the iris position and the setting for iris  
override (reference value for the lens iris) (see  
The iris override setting is indicated by four  
segments indicator as follows.  
Reference Indicator  
value  
+0.25  
Lower left segment is lit in grey.  
x
+0.5  
x
x
Left two segments are lit in grey.  
+0.75  
x
xx  
Left two segments and lower  
right segment are lit in grey.  
+1  
xx All segments are lit in grey.  
xx  
–0.25  
Lower left segment is lit in  
white.  
s
–0.5  
–0.75  
–1  
s
s
Left two segments are lit in  
white.  
s
ss  
Left two segments and lower  
right segment are lit in white.  
ss All segments are lit in white.  
ss  
Viewfinder Screen Display  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
 
Chapter2 Preparations  
Note on using the battery pack  
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully  
recharged.  
Preparing a Power  
Supply  
To attach the battery pack  
1
Press the battery pack against the back  
of the camcorder, aligning the line on  
the side of the battery pack with the  
matching line on the camcorder.  
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and  
AC adaptors listed below.  
• BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Lithium-ion  
Battery Pack  
• AC power using the AC-DN2B/DN10 AC  
Adaptor  
CAUTION  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace only with the same or equivalent type  
recommended by the manufacturer.  
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey the law  
in the relative area or country.  
Using a Battery Pack  
When a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Battery  
Pack is used, the camcorder will operate  
continuously for the time shown below.  
1 BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S  
2 Align these lines.  
Model name  
BP-GL95  
BP-GL65  
BP-L60S  
Operating time  
2
Slide the battery pack down until its  
“LOCK” arrow points at the matching  
line on the camcorder.  
Approx. 310 minutes  
Approx. 210 minutes  
Approx. 210 minutes  
Approx. 270 minutes  
BP-L80S  
WARNING  
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as  
sunshine, fire or the like.  
Note  
The battery pack operating time depends on the  
frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient  
temperature when used.  
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger  
suitable for each battery.  
1 “LOCK” arrow  
2 Matching line on the camcorder  
For details on the battery charging procedure, refer  
to the battery charger operation manual.  
Preparing a Power Supply  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Note  
Attaching the Viewfinder  
If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminal  
may be damaged.  
To detach the battery pack  
Holding the release button in, pull the battery  
pack up.  
CAUTION  
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the  
camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun.  
Direct sunlight can enter through the eyepiece, be  
focused in the viewfinder and cause fire.  
Attaching the Supplied Viewfinder  
Note  
When attaching the viewfinder, make notes of the  
following points.  
• Be sure to power off the camcorder before coupling the  
viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF connector  
(rectangular). If you make this connection when the  
camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not  
function properly.  
Release button  
Notes  
• Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the  
camcorder’s VF connector (rectangular). If the  
coupling is loose, noise may appear on the video or the  
tally indicator may not operate properly.  
• During recording and playback (while the ACCESS  
indicator is lit), be careful never to remove the battery  
pack.  
• Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing  
the battery pack.  
1
1 Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right  
positioning ring, 2 attach the  
viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting  
shoe, and 3 tighten the viewfinder left-  
to-right positioning ring.  
Using AC Power  
Mount an AC-DN2B/DN10 on the camcorder in  
the same way as a battery pack, then connect to  
the AC power supply.  
Stopper  
The AC-DN2B/DN10 can supply up to 100 W of  
power.  
Viewfinder left-  
to-right  
positioning ring  
To an AC outlet  
Attaching the Viewfinder  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
Couple the viewfinder connector to the  
VF connector (rectangular).  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Angle  
VF connector (rectangular)  
You can adjust the angle of the viewfinder.  
To reverse the display (image/text indication)  
vertically  
The viewfinder can be rotated as much as 180  
degrees toward the direction facing the subject.  
When you do this, the picture and other  
information displayed in the viewfinder appear  
upside down. To restore the normal display, set  
the MIRROR switch on the rear panel of the  
viewfinder to B/T.  
Detaching the viewfinder  
You can detach the viewfinder by following the  
attaching procedure in reverse order, but there is  
an additional action to take: when detaching the  
viewfinder from the fitting shoe, pull up the  
stopper.  
Lifting Up the Viewfinder Barrel  
and Eyepiece  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Position  
You can view the LCD screen inside the  
viewfinder or its mirrored image by lifting up the  
viewfinder barrel or the eyepiece.  
This section describes how to lift up the  
viewfinder barrel and detach it. The eyepiece can  
also be lifted up and detached in the same way.  
To adjust the viewfinder left-to-right position,  
loosen the left-to-right positioning ring, and to  
adjust the front-to-back position, loosen the front-  
to-back positioning knob.  
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring  
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob  
LCD screen  
Attaching the Viewfinder  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
             
To raise up the viewfinder barrel  
To detach the viewfinder barrel  
Push the clip on the bottom to release (1) and  
flip up the viewfinder barrel (2).  
It locks at the 120-degree position.  
Normally use it in the locked position.  
Although you can open it farther from the lock  
position, once return it to the closed position to  
lock it at the 120-degree position again.  
1
2
3
Push the clip on the bottom to release.  
Flip up the viewfinder barrel.  
Slide the knob on the top to the opposite  
side of the viewfinder barrel.  
4
Detach the viewfinder barrel by  
horizontally sliding it.  
To reverse the display (image/text indication)  
horizontally  
By setting the MIRROR switch on the rear panel  
of the viewfinder to L/R, you can reverse the  
picture and other information displayed in the  
viewfinder horizontally.  
Attaching the Viewfinder  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder  
positioning levers and the front-to-back  
viewfinder positioning knobs, and then  
pull the viewfinder slide assembly  
forward.  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus  
and Screen  
To adjust the viewfinder focus  
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the  
viewfinder image is sharpest.  
2
Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal  
wrench, detach the viewfinder slide  
assembly.  
Bolts with  
hexagonal  
hole  
Diopter adjustment ring  
To adjust the viewfinder screen  
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the  
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.  
Viewfinder slide assembly  
3
Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied  
bolts.  
1 PEAKING control  
2 CONTRAST control  
3 BRIGHT control  
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder  
Rotation Bracket  
By fitting an optional BKW-401 Viewfinder  
Rotation Bracket, you can rotate the viewfinder  
out of the way so that your right leg does not hit  
the viewfinder while you are carrying the  
camcorder.  
Bolts supplied with the BKW-401  
Attaching the Viewfinder  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4
Adjust the front-to-back position so  
that the arm of the BKW-401 does not  
touch the handle when it is raised.  
Adjust position so that arm  
does not touch handle  
Attaching a 5-inch Electronic Viewfinder  
You can attach an optional DXF-51or DXF-C50W (5-inch) Electronic Viewfinder. To attach it, an  
Accessory Shoe Kit (service part number: A-8274-968-B) is required.  
For details, consult a Sony service representative.  
Note  
It is not possible to use the supplied viewfinder and a 5-inch viewfinder at the same time.  
Remove the cover of the grip, and attach the shoe and stopper screw of the Accessory Shoe Kit.  
Fixing ring  
Guide plate  
VF cable  
Shoe a)  
Stopper screw a)  
a) Supplied with the Accessory Shoe Kit  
Attaching the Viewfinder  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
3
Press the MENU knob.  
The settings for selectable areas of use are  
displayed.  
Setting the Area of Use  
When using the camcorder for the first  
time  
The area of use is not factory preset. Before using  
the camcorder, you need to set this item. (You  
cannot use the camcorder without setting this  
item.)  
Turn the MENU knob to select the  
desired area of use.  
Setting  
Area of use  
To set the area of use  
NTSC Area  
NTSC area (for areas other  
a)  
than Japan)  
b)  
NTSC(J) Area  
PAL Area  
NTSC area (Japan)  
c)  
PAL area  
a) The composite signal output from this camcorder  
is an NTSC signal with a black setup (7.5 IRE).  
The system frequency is 59.94i.  
b) The composite signal output from this camcorder  
is an NTSC signal with no black setup. The  
system frequency is 59.94i.  
c) The composite signal output from this camcorder  
is a PAL signal. The system frequency is 50i.  
POWER switch  
MENU knob  
1
Set the POWER switch to the ON  
position.  
The screen for setting the area of use appears  
4
5
Set the following items.  
• Time Zone  
• Date/Time  
in the viewfinder.  
Turn the MENU knob to select  
“Finish”, then press the MENU knob.  
The camcorder is now ready for use.  
Setting the Area of Use  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
     
Setting the Date/Time of  
the Internal Clock  
Mounting and Adjusting  
the Lens  
You can set or change the date and time of the  
internal clock. The date and time set are reflected  
in the timecode.  
Note  
Always power the camcorder off before mounting or  
removing a lens.  
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu  
For information about using the lens, refer to the  
operation manual for the lens.  
1
2
3
Select MAINTENANCE >Clock Set  
>Date/Time in the setup menu.  
Lens mount  
securing rubber  
Press the MENU knob.  
The Date/Time setting window appears.  
Turn the MENU knob to display the  
desired value, and press the knob.  
The selection shifts to the next item on the  
right.  
1
2
3
Push the lens locking lever up and  
remove the lens mount cap from the  
lens mount.  
4
5
To continue the remaining settings,  
repeat step 3.  
Align the center pin on the lens with the  
center slot in the lens mount, and insert  
the lens into the mount.  
Making sure that “SET” is selected,  
press the MENU knob.  
The internal clock is set with the date and  
Holding the lens in place, push the lens  
locking lever down to lock the lens.  
time set in steps 3 and 4.  
Caution  
To cancel the setting  
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off  
while the camcorder is being used. This could  
cause a serious accident. Make sure the lens is  
firmly locked. It is recommended that the lens  
Before executing step 5, push the MENU  
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the  
CANCEL/PRST side.  
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock / Mounting and Adjusting the Lens  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
                 
mount securing rubber be put on the lens locking  
lever as illustrated above.  
1
Open the iris, position the supplied  
flange focal length adjustment chart  
approximately 3 meters (10 ft) away  
from the camcorder, and arrange the  
lighting to obtain a satisfactory video  
output.  
If you have attached an aberration correction  
lens  
The aberration correction function is activated  
automatically. Starting the camcorder with an  
aberration correction lens may require more time  
than normally because of data loading at start-up.  
The lens supplied with the PMW-320K is an  
aberration correction lens. Contact a Sony service  
representative for information about other  
aberration correction lenses.  
2
3
Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO  
(power zoom mode).  
Hold down the flange focal length  
adjustment button for 3 seconds.  
The flange focal length adjustment starts.  
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length  
During adjustment  
The message “AUTO FB Adjust  
EXECUTING” appears on the viewfinder  
screen.  
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you  
zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the  
flange focal length (the distance from the plane of  
the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane).  
Make this adjustment just one time after  
mounting or changing the lens.  
If the adjustment completes correctly  
The message on the viewfinder screen  
changes to “Auto FB Adjust: OK”.  
When carrying out the adjustment, use the  
supplied flange focal length adjustment chart as  
the subject.  
If the flange focal length adjustment does  
not complete correctly  
Check the subject and lighting conditions,  
and repeat the adjustment.  
When using a non-auto focus lens  
1
2
Set the iris to manual.  
Open the iris, position the supplied  
flange focal length adjustment chart  
approximately 3 meters (10 ft) away  
from the camcorder, and arrange the  
lighting to obtain a satisfactory video  
output.  
About 3 m (10 ft)  
Notes  
3
Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or  
F.B ring (flange focal length adjustment  
ring).  
• If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or move  
the camcorder or subject during adjustment, this will  
cause an adjustment error.  
• Place the subject (the flange focal length adjustment  
chart) so that it appears at the center of the screen at the  
telephoto end. Arrange so that no nearby object (no  
object closer to the camera than the chart) enters the  
screen at the wide-angle end.  
4
5
Use manual or power zoom to set the  
lens to telephoto.  
Point the camcorder at the chart by  
turning the focus ring and focus on it.  
Carrying out the adjustment  
6
7
Set the zoom ring to wide angle.  
When using the auto focus lens  
With the lens supplied with the PMW-320K,  
zoom and focus operations automatically adjust  
the flange focal length.  
Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart  
is in focus, being careful not to disturb  
the focus ring.  
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8
9
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays  
in focus all the way from wide angle to  
telephoto.  
Preparing the Audio  
Input System  
Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing  
screws.  
Connecting a Microphone to the  
MIC IN Connector  
Attach the supplied microphone to the  
microphone holder of the supplied viewfinder.  
1
Loosen the screw (1) and open the  
microphone holder clamp (2).  
Microphone holder clamp  
2
Place the microphone in the  
microphone holder.  
1 Place the microphone in the holder so  
that “UP” is at the top.  
2 Close the microphone holder.  
3 Tighten the screw.  
3
Plug the microphone cable into the MIC  
IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN  
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 switch for the  
Preparing the Audio Input System  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
channel on which you want to record  
the audio from this microphone to  
FRONT.  
Microphone  
4
Secure the microphone cable with the  
cable clamp.  
Connecting Microphones to the  
AUDIO IN Connectors  
You can connect up to two monaural  
microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
connectors, using an optional CAC-12  
Microphone Holder.  
The following is the procedure for attaching an  
electret condenser microphone such as the ECM-  
674/678.  
2
3
Connect the microphone cable to the  
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.  
Set the switches as follows.  
• Set the AUDIO IN selectors indicated  
below, depending on the power supply type  
of the microphone.  
Internal power supply: MIC  
External power supply: +48V  
• Set the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switch for the  
channel to which the microphone is  
connected to REAR.  
On how to attach the CAC-12, refer to the operation  
manual for the CAC-12.  
1
Attach the electret condenser  
microphone.  
1 Loosen the ball joint lock lever.  
2 Wind the microphone spacer (sheet  
type, supplied with the microphone)  
around the microphone, while peeling  
off the protective sheets on both sides  
of the microphone spacer.  
3 Place the microphone in the holder so  
that “UP” is at the top.  
4 Close the microphone holder.  
5 Tighten the screw.  
6 Position so that the microphone does  
not interfere with the viewfinder and  
tighten the ball joint lock lever.  
Preparing the Audio Input System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
   
For details of these units, refer to the operation  
manuals for them.  
Note  
The optional WRR Mount Bracket (service part number:  
A-8278-057-B) is required to fit the WRR-862.  
For details, contact your vendor or a Sony service  
representative  
To fit the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S  
1
2
3
Remove the four fixing screws holding  
the cover of the portable tuner/receiver  
housing slot located in the rear of the  
camcorder, to remove the cover.  
1 AUDIO IN selectors  
2 Monaural microphone  
3 AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switches  
4 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector  
4
Switch the input level to match the  
sensitivity of the microphone used.  
Switch the input level by changing the setting of  
MAINTENANCE >Audio >Rear MIC CH1/  
CH2 Ref in the setup menu (factory default  
setting is –60 dB). For details, see page 116.  
Notes  
Insert the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S  
into the housing slot, and fasten the four  
fixing screws.  
• If the input level on the camcorder is not at an  
appropriate setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud  
sounds may be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio  
may be affected.  
• In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors  
on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V  
power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are  
fitted. If the microphone cable has a female connector,  
use an adaptor.  
• When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once  
you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to  
lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12 (in step 1).  
After detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two  
screws back into their original places.  
DWR-S01D or WRR-855S  
Set the AUDIO IN selector for the  
channel to which you want to input  
audio signal to WIRELESS (see  
Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner  
(for a UHF Wireless Microphone  
System)  
To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system,  
power the camcorder off and then fit one of the  
following UHF portable tuners.  
• DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver  
• WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
• WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized  
Diversity Tuner  
Preparing the Audio Input System  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Tripod Mounting  
1
Attach the optional VCT-14/U14  
Tripod Adaptor to the tripod.  
Red button  
Tripod adaptor  
Lever  
Note  
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged  
position even after the camcorder is removed. If this  
happens, press the red button and move the lever as  
shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position.  
If the pin remains in the engaged position, you will not  
be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.  
Camera mount  
2
Mount the camcorder on the tripod  
adaptor.  
Slide the camcorder forward along the  
groove in the adaptor until it clicks.  
To remove the camcorder from the tripod  
adaptor  
Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the  
direction of the arrow.  
Tripod Mounting  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting a Video  
Light  
Using the Shoulder  
Strap  
With this camcorder, you can use the Anton  
Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light  
(powered by 12 V with maximum power  
consumption of 50 W).  
• If you connect the video light to the LIGHT  
connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT  
switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and  
off automatically as you start and stop recording  
on this camcorder.  
To attach the shoulder strap  
1
Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap  
fitting.  
Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.  
• The output of the LIGHT connector on the  
camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the  
camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power  
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).  
The brightness or color temperature of the light  
will not change according to voltage increase.  
Clip  
Notes  
• Do not use a video light with power consumption of  
over 50 W.  
• The brightness or color temperature of the light will  
change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN  
connector or from the battery pack) is under 12 V.  
2
Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap  
fitting on the other side of the grip in the  
same way as in step 1.  
To attach the video light  
Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on  
the camcorder grip, and connect the video light  
cable to the LIGHT connector.  
Note  
The accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder is of the  
1/4-inch tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with  
a slide-type shoe, use the supplied cold shoe kit. On how  
to fit the cold shoe kit, refer to “Using a External Hard  
Disk” in the Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM  
(labeled “Manuals for Solid-State Memory  
Camcorder”).  
Connecting a Video Light / Using the Shoulder Strap  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
           
To remove the shoulder strap  
Adjusting the Shoulder  
Pad Position  
Press here and pull in the direction  
shown by the arrow to release.  
You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth  
within a 40 mm range. This adjustment helps you  
get the best balance for shooting with the  
camcorder on your shoulder.  
Shoulder pad  
1
2
3
Raise the lever in the center of the  
shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder  
pad.  
Slide the shoulder pad backward or  
forward until it is in the most  
convenient position.  
Bring down the lever to lock the  
shoulder pad in the selected position.  
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter3 Adjustments and Settings  
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 91).  
Setting the Video Format  
The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution and system  
frequency.  
OPERATION >Format menu settings  
HD/SD System Line Rec Format  
Video format (recording  
a) format/system frequency)  
Frame size  
System Frequency  
59.94i  
50i  
HD  
1080  
HQ 1920  
HQ 1920/59.94i  
HQ 1920/50i  
1920×1080  
29.97P  
25P  
HQ 1920/29.97P  
HQ 1920/25P  
23.98P  
59.94i  
50i  
HQ 1920/23.98P  
HQ 1440/59.94i  
HQ 1440/50i  
HQ 1440  
1440×1080  
29.97P  
25P  
HQ 1440/29.97P  
HQ 1440/25P  
23.98P  
59.94i  
50i  
HQ 1440/23.98P  
SP 1440/59.94i  
SP 1440/50i  
SP 1440  
HQ 1280  
b)  
SP 1440/23.98P  
23.98P  
720  
59.94P  
50P  
HQ 1280/59.94P  
HQ 1280/50P  
720×1280  
29.97P  
25P  
HQ 1280/29.97P  
HQ 1280/25P  
23.98P  
59.94i  
50i  
HQ 1280/23.98P  
DVCAM/59.94i  
DVCAM/50i  
SD  
DVCAM  
720×480  
720×576  
720×480  
c)  
DVCAM/29.97P  
29.97P  
c)  
DVCAM/25P  
720×576  
25P  
a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P/23.98P: When OPERATION >Format >Country in the setup menu is set to [NTSC Area] or  
[NTSC(J) Area]  
50i/25P/50P: When OPERATION >Format >Country in the setup menu is set to [PAL Area]  
b) 59.94i after 2-3 pulldown is recorded  
c) Converted to PsF and recorded  
Setting the Video Format  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Changing the Video Format  
Adjusting the Black  
Balance and the White  
Balance  
Refer to the above table and change the settings of  
the relevant items.  
1
Select OPERATION >Format in the  
setup menu (see page 94).  
To ensure excellent image quality when using this  
camcorder, conditions may require that both the  
black balance and the white balance be adjusted.  
Black balance and white balance adjustment  
values that are automatically set by the camcorder  
and the various settings are stored in the  
camcorder memory and retained even when the  
power is turned off.  
Black balance adjustment  
The black balance will require adjustment in the  
following cases.  
• When the camcorder is used for the first time  
• When the camcorder has not been used for a  
long time  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the item  
to change, and press the knob.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the  
setting, and press the knob.  
A confirmation message appears.  
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in  
which the surrounding temperature has changed  
greatly  
• When the GAIN selector (L/M/H/Turbo) values  
have been changed by using OPERATION  
>Gain Switch in the setup menu.  
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black  
balance when using the camcorder after it has  
been off.  
4
5
Select [Execute] to execute, or select  
[Cancel] to cancel, and then press the  
MENU knob.  
When the setting of HD/SD or Country  
was changed, power the camcorder off  
and on again.  
White balance adjustment  
Always readjust the white balance when the  
lighting conditions change.  
Adjusting the Black Balance  
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are  
performed in the following order: black set and  
black balance. Manual black balance adjustment  
can be selected from the setup menu.  
For details of manual black balance adjustment,  
refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
Automatic black balance adjustment is disabled  
in the following case.  
• During recording  
• In a special recording modes (Picture Cache  
Rec, Interval Rec, Frame Rec, Slow & Quick)  
• When the shutter mode is SLS  
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
       
1
2
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.  
Adjusting the White Balance  
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to  
BLACK and release the switch.  
The message “Executing...” appears during  
execution, and changes to “Done” when the  
adjustment finishes. Adjustment values are  
saved to memory automatically.  
1
Set the switches and selectors as shown  
below.  
• GAIN switch: L (set to a gain value that is  
as small as possible)  
• OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM  
a)  
• WHITE BAL switch: A or B  
Notes  
a) Adjustment values are saved to memory B only  
when OPERATION >White Setting >White  
Switch<B> in the setup menu, is set to  
[Memory].  
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is  
automatically closed.  
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain  
selection circuit is automatically activated so you may  
see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not  
a fault.  
• Output from the i.LINK connector stops temporarily if  
you execute black balance adjustment during i.LINK  
output. Output from the connector resumes when black  
balance adjustment finishes.  
2
3
Set the FILTER selector to suit the  
lighting conditions as follows.  
Place a white test card under the same  
lighting conditions as for the subject to  
be shot and zoom up to it.  
Alternatively, any white object such as a  
cloth or a wall can be used.  
The absolute minimum white area is as  
follows.  
If automatic black balance adjustment  
cannot be made  
If the black balance adjustment cannot be  
completed normally, an error message will appear  
for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.  
Possible messages are listed below.  
Rectangle centered on the screen. The  
lengths of the sides are 70% of the length  
and width of the screen.  
Error message Meaning  
NG: Iris Not  
Closed  
The lens iris did not close;  
adjustment was impossible.  
Adjustment could not be  
completed within the standard  
number of attempts.  
NG: Timeout  
NG: Out of  
Range  
The difference between the  
reference value and the current  
value is so great that it exceeds  
the range. Adjustment was  
impossible.  
Note  
Make sure there are not bright spots in the  
rectangle.  
If any of the above error messages is displayed,  
retry the black balance adjustment.  
If the error message occurs again, an internal  
check is necessary.  
4
5
Adjust the lens iris.  
Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an  
appropriate setting.  
Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/  
manual switch on the lens to automatic.  
For information about this internal check, refer to  
the Maintenance Manual.  
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to  
WHITE and then release the switch.  
Note  
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS  
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If  
this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.  
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
   
If you have no time to adjust the white  
balance  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
This makes it possible to automatically set the  
white balance to 5600K (factory default value) by  
pressing the COLOR TEMP. button.  
The color temperature to which the white balance  
is set when the COLOR TEMP. button is pressed  
can be selected from among 3200K, 4300K,  
5600K, and 6300K on OPERATION  
>Assignable SW in the setup menu. You can also  
assign color temperatures to the ASSIGN. 1/3  
switches or ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches.  
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
The message “Executing...” appears during  
execution, and changes to “OK: (color  
temperature of subject)” when the  
adjustment finishes.  
The adjustment values are saved  
automatically in the memory selected in  
step 1 (A or B).  
To change the color temperature when  
the ND filter is switched  
Note  
You can assign electrical CC (color correction)  
filters to ND filters (see page 15). This allows you  
to change the color temperature automatically  
when the ND filter is switched.  
If the camcorder has a zoom lens with an automatic  
iris, the iris may hunt 1) during the adjustment. To  
prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as  
IG, IS, or S) on the lens.  
1
Set MAINTENANCE >White Filter  
>ND Filter C.Temp in the setup menu  
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.  
1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of  
the image, resulting from repeated response to  
automatic iris control.  
2
To assign an electrical CC filter to  
FILTER selector position number 1,  
select [ND FLT C.Temp<1>]. To assign  
it to positions 2 to 4, select [ND FLT  
C.Temp<2-4>].  
If the automatic white balance adjustment  
cannot be made  
If the white balance adjustment cannot be  
completed normally, an error message will appear  
for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.  
Possible messages are listed below.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to select the  
desired color temperature.  
As you turn the MENU knob, the color  
temperature changes as follows: 3200K y  
4300K y 5600K y 6300K.  
Error message Meaning  
NG: Low Light The white video level is too low.  
Either open the lens iris or  
increase the gain.  
NG: Timeout  
Adjustment could not be  
completed within the standard  
number of attempts.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.  
NG: High Light The white video level is too  
high. Either stop down the lens  
iris or change the ND filter.  
If any of the above error messages is displayed,  
retry the white balance adjustment. If the error  
message occurs again, an internal check is  
necessary.  
For information about this internal check, refer to  
the Maintenance Manual.  
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
of the memories are not linked to ND filter  
settings in the following cases.  
• When the number of memories allocated to  
each of A and B is limited to one by setting  
OPERATION >White Setting >Filter White  
Memory in the setup menu to Off.  
• When the electrical CC filter switching function  
has been assigned to an assignable switch, or  
when a remote control unit has been connected.  
(In these cases, the contents of white balance  
memory are linked to electrical CC filter  
positions (A to D).)  
To switch between electrical CC filters  
with an assignable switch  
You can assign the function that switches  
between electrical CC filters to an assignable  
switch. This allows you to switch between color  
temperatures (3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that  
have been assigned to up to four positions (A to  
D) with each press of the assignable switch.  
Regardless of assignments to assignable  
switches, you can also switch between the color  
temperatures assigned to each position from a  
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit.  
Also, when OPERATION >White Setting  
>White Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to  
[ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)], and the  
WHITE BAL switch is set to B, the ATW  
function is activated to automatically adjust the  
white balance of the picture being shot for  
varying lighting conditions.  
1
2
Select MAINTENANCE >White Filter  
in the setup menu (see page 122).  
Select the position to which to assign a  
CC filter by selecting one of [Electrical  
CC<A>] to [Electrical CC <D>], and  
then turn the MENU knob to select the  
desired color temperature.  
As you turn the MENU knob, the color  
temperature changes as follows: 3200K y  
4300K y 5600K y 6300K.  
To set no color temperature  
Select “-----” with Electrical CC<C> or <D>  
selected.  
When the assignable switch is pressed, the  
setting for that position is not displayed. For  
example, if “-----” is set for one position, then  
switching between the remaining three  
positions is carried out.  
3
4
Repeat step 2 as required.  
Assign the electrical CC filter switching  
function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an  
assignable switch (see page 131).  
White balance memory  
Values stored in memory are held until the white  
balance is next adjusted even when the camcorder  
power is turned off.  
The camcorder has two white balance memories,  
A and B. You can automatically save adjustment  
values for each ND filter in the memory that  
corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch setting  
(A or B). The camcorder has four built-in ND  
filters, allowing you to save a total of eight  
adjustment values (4 × 2). However, the contents  
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
As shown in the following tables, the range of  
shutter speeds that can be set varies depending on  
whether the Slow & Quick Motion (S&Q)  
function is on or off.  
Setting the Electronic  
Shutter  
System lines: 1080  
System  
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)  
frequency  
S&Q: Off  
S&Q: On  
Shutter Modes  
59.94i  
50i  
60.00 to 3800  
50.00 to 3500  
The shutter modes that can be used with the  
electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can  
be selected are listed below.  
29.97P  
23.98P  
25P  
29.99 to 4100 32.01 to 4100  
23.99 to 3700 32.02 to 3700  
25.00 to 3900 32.03 to 3900  
System lines: 720  
Standard mode  
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving  
subjects with little blurring.  
System  
frequency  
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)  
S&Q: Off  
S&Q: On  
You can set the shutter speed in one of two shutter  
modes: Speed mode, in which the speed is set in  
seconds, and Angle mode, in which the speed is  
set in degrees.  
59.94P  
50P  
60.07 to 4100 32.01 to 4100  
50.03 to 3900 32.03 to 3900  
29.99 to 4100 32.01 to 4100  
23.99 to 3700 32.02 to 3700  
25.00 to 3900 32.03 to 3900  
29.97P  
23.98P  
25P  
Speed mode  
System  
frequency  
59.94i  
59.94P  
50i  
Shutter speed (unit: seconds)  
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode  
Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level  
lighting conditions.  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
60, 100, 120 125 250 500  
1
,
/
1000 2000  
Number of accumulated frames  
50P  
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16, 32, 64  
1
1
a)  
1
a) 1  
,
1
1
1
29.97P  
/
/
/
/
/
/
, /  
1
/
, /  
/
, /  
,
,
40  
50  
60 100, 120 125  
1
1
Notes  
,
/
,
/
,
/
250 500 1000 2000  
• SLS mode cannot be used when the video format is SP  
1440/23.98P or when the camcorder is in Slow &  
Quick Motion mode.  
• It is not possible to output the color bar signal, turn the  
SLS mode on or off, or change the number of  
accumulated frames when the number of accumulated  
frames is set to 16, 32 or 64.  
1
1
a)  
1
a)  
1
1
1
1
25P  
, /  
, /  
/
, /  
/
33  
50  
60, 100 120, 125  
1
1
1
,
/
,
/
,
/
250 500 1000 2000  
1
1
a)  
1
a)  
1
a)  
1
1
1
23.98P  
, /  
, /  
, / , / , /  
,
32  
48  
50  
60 96 100  
1
1
1
1
1
/
, / , / , /  
, /  
120, 125 250 500 1000 2000  
a) This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder is  
in Slow & Quick Motion mode and OPERATION  
>Rec Function >Frame Rate in the setup menu is set  
to a value that is greater than the system frequency.  
Selecting the Shutter Mode and  
Shutter Speed  
Angle mode  
180°, 90°, 45°, 22.5°, and 11.25°  
Notes  
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as  
the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of  
field.  
• The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the  
current system frequency.  
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode  
Select this mode for obtaining images with no  
horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects  
such as monitor screens.  
Setting the Electronic Shutter  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To switch between Speed mode and  
Angle mode  
To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS  
mode  
1
Select OPEARTION >Shutter Select  
>Shutter Select in the setup menu (see  
1
2
Set the shutter mode to ECS or SLS (see  
the previous item).  
Turn the MENU knob to select the  
desired frequency or number of frames.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to select Second  
or Degree, and then press the knob.  
To set the shutter mode and standard-  
mode shutter speed  
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained  
even when the camcorder power is turned off.  
1
Push the SHUTTER selector from ON  
to SELECT.  
The current shutter setting indication appears  
for about three seconds.  
2
Before the shutter setting indication  
disappears, push the SHUTTER  
selector down to SELECT again and  
repeat this until the desired mode or  
speed appears.  
When all modes and speeds are displayed,  
the display changes in the following order.  
Speed Mode (with system frequency 59.94i)  
SLS Mode  
ECS Mode  
Note  
Depending on the frame rate setting (see page 76), some  
shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow & Quick  
Motion mode. These speeds are replaced by the slowest  
selectable shutter speed.  
Example: If you perform Slow & Quick Motion  
shooting when setting the frame rate to 60 and the video  
format to HQ1280/29.97P  
The shutter speed is indicated as follows.  
When Slow & Quick Motion mode is off  
1/40t1/50t1/60t1/100t...  
When Slow & Quick Motion mode is on  
1/60t1/60t1/60t1/100t...  
Setting the Electronic Shutter  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To set the automatic iris window  
Changing the Reference  
Value for Automatic Iris  
Adjustment  
1
Set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Iris  
Window Indication in the setup menu to  
On.  
The current automatic iris window appears  
on the viewfinder screen.  
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris  
window on the screen, set to Off.  
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment  
can be changed to aid the shooting of clear  
pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blown-  
out highlights. The reference value for the lens  
iris can be set within the following range with  
respect to the standard value.  
• 0.25 to 1 (increasing by increments of 0.25):  
About 0.25 to 1 stop further open  
• –0.25 to –1 (decreasing by increments of 0.25):  
About 0.25 to 1 stop further close  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to select Iris  
Window, and then press the knob.  
Turn the MENU knob until the desired  
auto iris window appears, and then  
press the knob.  
Also you can set the area where light detection  
occurs.  
The shaded parts indicate the  
area where light detection  
To change the reference value  
If you select “Var”, the following items  
become effective and you can set the window  
of the desired size. Set the following items  
with MAINTENANCE >Auto Iris2.  
1
Set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Iris  
Override in the setup menu to On (see  
2
3
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
Item  
Setting  
Iris Var Width The width of the window  
Iris Var Height The height of the window  
Iris Var H Pos The position of the window  
in the horizontal direction  
Turn the MENU knob to change the  
reference value.  
Note  
Iris Var V Pos. The position of the window  
in the vertical direction.  
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is  
not ECS.  
When you exit the menu, the auto iris window  
selected in step 3 appears.  
Unless you need to keep this window displayed,  
set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Iris Window  
Indication in the setup menu to Off.  
An indicator of the current reference value is  
shown at the iris position indication (see  
page 31) on the viewfinder screen.  
To make the iris more open  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as  
seen from the front of the camcorder.  
Select one of 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, or 1.  
To counter problems with very bright  
highlights  
To stop down the iris  
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too  
much, leaving the overall image dark, or the  
highlights may be blown out. In such cases,  
setting the highlight clip function on reduces the  
luminance range, avoiding problems from the  
automatic iris correction.  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen  
from the front of the camcorder.  
Select one of –0.25, –0.5, –0.75, or –1.  
The changed reference value is retained until  
the power of the camcorder is turned off.  
Even if the reference value is changed, it  
reverts to the standard value every time the  
power is turned on.  
Set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Clip High Light in  
the setup menu to On.  
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
       
Zooming  
Adjusting the Focus  
The lens supplied with the PMW-320K allows  
you to shoot with manual and servo zooming.  
The lens supplied with the PMW-320K allows  
you to adjust the focus in the following three  
ways.  
Full MF (full manual focus) mode  
This mode supports focusing with the focus ring  
only.  
Without changing your grip, you can focus all the  
way from to the shortest shooting distance.  
Switching between Zoom Modes  
Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO (servo zoom) or  
MANU (manual zoom).  
MF (manual focus) mode  
Using Manual Zoom  
In this mode, auto focus is enabled temporarily  
when you press the PUSH AF button.  
You can also use the MF assist function.  
With the ZOOM switch set to MANU, turn the  
zoom ring.  
AF (auto focus) mode  
In this mode, auto focus is always enabled.  
The focus ring and the PUSH AF button are also  
enabled.  
Using Servo Zoom  
With the ZOOM switch set to SERVO, operate  
the power zoom lever. The current lens zoom  
position appears in the viewfinder, over the range  
0 (wide-angle) to 99 (telephoto) (see page 28).  
Push to the W (wide) side when you want wide-  
angle, and push to the T (telephoto) side when  
you want telephoto. The zoom speed increases  
when you push the lever deeply, and decreases  
when you push less deeply.  
Note  
The lens is designed with an extra margin at the infinity  
position (), to compensate for focus drifting due to  
variations in temperature. When shooting a subject at  
infinity in MF or Full MF mode, check the picture in the  
viewfinder as you focus.  
Adjusting in Full MF Mode  
When you slide the focus ring back (toward the  
camcorder), the focus mode becomes Full MF  
mode, in which all focus adjustments are manual.  
Note  
When you slide the focus ring back, the focus instantly  
moves to the mark position.  
Focus by turning the focus ring while viewing the  
viewfinder.  
The distance indications on the ring are valid in  
Full MF mode. The distances where the picture is  
in focus correspond to absolute positions of the  
focus ring.  
Zooming / Adjusting the Focus  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
White line indicating the current distance  
Adjusting in AF Mode  
When you slide the focus ring forward, and set the  
FOCUS switch to A (auto), the focus mode  
becomes AF mode, in which auto focus is always  
active.  
The distance indications on the ring are invalid in  
AF mode.  
Distance indication  
Focus ring  
Focusing in AF mode  
In AF mode, the camcorder monitors the video  
for changes, and starts auto focus whenever it  
detects a change. Auto focusing ends when the  
subject is in focus, but the auto focus function  
remains on standby.  
In AF mode, you can also start auto focusing by  
pressing the PUSH AF button or by turning the  
focus ring.  
Peaking  
You can turn the PEAKING knob on the  
viewfinder to use the peaking function. Edges are  
emphasized in the monitor picture, which  
facilitates manual focusing.  
The recorded video signals are not affected.  
Using Macro Mode  
Adjusting in MF Mode  
When the focus mode is MF or AF, you can set  
the MACRO switch to the ON side to enable  
macro mode. Macro mode allows you to focus  
over the range that includes the macro area.  
Macro mode is disabled in Full MF mode.  
When you slide the focus ring forward (toward  
the lens hood), and set the FOCUS switch to M  
(manual), the focus mode becomes MF mode, in  
which focus adjustments are manual but auto  
focus is available only when necessary.  
Using the focus ring  
Focus by turning the focus ring while viewing the  
viewfinder.  
The distance indications on the ring are invalid in  
MF mode.  
One-push auto focus  
Press the PUSH AF button. Auto focus is enabled  
temporarily (one-push auto focus).  
One-push auto focus ends when the subject is  
brought into focus.  
MF assist function  
When the MF assist function is on, auto focus  
starts when you stop adjusting with the focus ring,  
enabling fine adjustments with the subject at the  
center of the screen.  
Auto focusing by the MF assist function ends  
when the fine adjustments end.  
Adjusting the Focus  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
3
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es)  
corresponding to the channel(s) selected  
in step 1 to MANUAL.  
Adjusting the Audio  
Level  
With the LEVEL control(s) for the  
channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so  
that the audio level meter shows up to  
–20 dB for a normal input volume.  
When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to  
AUTO, the input levels of analog audio signals  
recorded on each channel are adjusted  
automatically. You can also make manual  
adjustments.  
Correspondence between recording level  
adjustments and audio level controls  
On MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu,  
you can select which audio level control controls  
the audio recording level of the input to each of  
the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. The  
correspondences between the settings of the menu  
items and the controls are as follows.  
Note  
Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO,  
the input levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted  
automatically.  
Target audio level for manual audio level  
adjustment  
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.  
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level  
of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level  
is excessive.  
Rear1/WRR Level: Channel 1 recording level  
Setting  
Side1  
Knob  
LEVEL (CH1) knob  
MIC LEVEL knob  
Front  
Front+Side1  
LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC  
LEVEL knob (linked operation)  
Excessive input level  
Rear2/WRR Level: Channel 2 recording level  
Setting  
Side2  
Knob  
LEVEL (CH2) knob  
MIC LEVEL knob  
Front  
Front+Side2  
LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC  
LEVEL knob (linked operation)  
Note  
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2)  
controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the  
MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on  
channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position  
of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL  
(CH-1/CH-2) controls.  
Target input level  
Manually Adjusting the Audio  
Levels of the Audio Inputs from  
the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
Connectors  
Manually Adjusting the Audio  
Level of the MIC IN Connector  
1
To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO  
IN CH1 or CH2 connector, set the  
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 switch to  
REAR.  
1
Set either or both of the AUDIO IN  
switch(es) to FRONT.  
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for  
the desired channel(s) selected in step 1  
to MANUAL.  
To adjust both input signals, set both  
switches to REAR.  
Adjusting the Audio Level  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and  
adjust so that the audio level meter  
shows up to –20 dB for a normal input  
volume.  
CH3 switch  
FRONT  
Channel 3 recording target  
Front microphone audio  
Audio signal input to AUDIO IN  
CH1 connector  
REAR  
WIRELESS  
Wireless microphone audio  
Correspondence between recording level  
adjustments and audio level controls  
On MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu,  
you can select which audio level control controls  
the audio recording level of the front microphone  
input. The correspondences between the settings  
of the menu items and the controls are as follows.  
CH4 switch  
FRONT  
Channel 4 recording target  
Front microphone audio  
Audio signal input to AUDIO IN  
CH2 connector  
REAR  
WIRELESS  
Wireless microphone audio  
You can have the selection made automatically,  
as follows.  
MIC CH1 Level: Channel 1 recording level  
To automatically select the same audio as on  
channels 1 and 2  
Set MAINTENANCE >Audio >Audio CH3/4  
Setting  
Side1  
Knob  
LEVEL (CH1) knob  
MIC LEVEL knob  
Front  
Mode of the setup menu to [Ch 1/2].  
Front+Side1  
LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC  
LEVEL knob (linked operation)  
Adjusting the audio recording levels  
MIC CH2 Level: Channel 2 recording level  
To adjust automatically  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switch to  
AUTO.  
Setting  
Side2  
Knob  
LEVEL (CH2) knob  
MIC LEVEL knob  
Front  
To adjust manually  
Front+Side2  
LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC  
LEVEL knob (linked operation)  
1
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switch  
to MANUAL.  
Note  
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control  
and LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls linked together, if the  
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls are set to 0, the audio  
signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check  
the position of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls before  
adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.  
Select the knobs that adjust the audio  
levels with the Audio CH3 Level and  
Audio CH4 Level items under  
MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup  
menu.  
Audio CH3 Level: Channel 3 recording  
Recording Audio on Channels 3  
and 4  
level  
Setting  
Side3  
Knob  
LEVEL (CH3) knob  
MIC LEVEL knob  
LEVEL (CH3) knob and  
MIC LEVEL knob (linked  
operation)  
Selecting the recorded audio  
You can select the audio recorded on audio  
channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4  
switches.  
Front  
Front+Side3  
Audio CH4 Level: Channel 4 recording  
level  
Adjusting the Audio Level  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting  
Side4  
Knob  
Setting the Time Data  
LEVEL (CH4) knob  
MIC LEVEL knob  
LEVEL (CH4) knob and  
MIC LEVEL knob (linked  
operation)  
Front  
Front+Side4  
You can now adjust the levels of audio  
channels 3 and 4 with the knobs selected  
here.  
Note  
When picture cache mode is enabled, it is not possible to  
set time data, even if you set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN  
switch to SET. If you want to set time data, first exit  
picture cache mode.  
Setting the Timecode  
The timecode setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 :  
00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds :  
frames).  
1
2
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK  
switch to PRESET.  
3
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to  
SET.  
The first (leftmost) digit of timecode flashes.  
Use the up and down arrow buttons to  
change values, and use the left and right  
arrow buttons to move the flashing  
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.  
To reset the timecode value to 00:00:00:00  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to  
F-RUN or R-RUN.  
F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator  
keeps running.  
R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode  
generator runs only while recording.  
To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame  
mode  
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-  
drop frame (NDF) mode on MAINTENANCE  
>Timecode in the setup menu.  
Setting the Time Data  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To make the timecode consecutive  
Synchronizing the Timecode  
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to  
R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the  
media normally produces consecutive timecode.  
However, once you remove the media and record  
on another media, the timecode will no longer be  
consecutive when you use the original media  
again for recording. In this case, to make the  
timecode consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/  
CLOCK switch to REGEN.  
You can synchronize the internal timecode  
generator of this camcorder with an external  
generator for the regeneration of an external  
timecode. You can also synchronize the timecode  
generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the  
internal generator of this camcorder.  
Connections for timecode  
synchronization  
Connect both the reference video signal and the  
external timecode as illustrated below.  
Saving the real Time in the Timecode  
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to  
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode.  
When it is necessary to set the actual time, use  
MAINTENANCE >Clock Set >Date/Time in the  
setup menu.  
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external  
timecode  
Setting the User Bits  
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal  
digits), you can record user information such as  
the date, time, or scene number on the timecode  
track.  
External timecode  
Reference video signal  
1
2
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.  
1 GENLOCK IN connector  
2 TC IN connector  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to  
SET.  
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.  
3
Use the up and down arrow buttons to  
change values, and use the left and right  
arrow buttons to move the flashing  
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.  
To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to  
F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the  
desired operating mode for the  
timecode generator.  
To store the user bit setting in memory  
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is  
automatically retained in memory even when the  
power is turned off.  
Setting the Time Data  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of  
camcorders (including one reference  
camcorder)  
This operation synchronizes the internal  
timecode generator with the external  
timecode. After about 10 seconds, you can  
disconnect the external timecode without  
losing the synchronization.  
Notes  
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal  
timecode is immediately synchronized with the  
external timecode and the counter display will show  
the value of the external timecode. However, wait for  
a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before  
recording.  
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the  
same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the  
camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a  
case, the internal timecode is not correctly  
synchronized with the external timecode.  
User bit settings during timecode  
synchronization  
When the timecode is synchronized, only the time  
data is synchronized with the external timecode  
value.  
To release the timecode synchronization  
First disconnect the external timecode, then set  
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.  
To another camcorder to be synchronized  
To change the power supply from the battery  
pack to an external power supply during  
timecode synchronization  
1 VIDEO OUT connector  
2 TC OUT connector  
3 TC IN connector  
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect  
the external power supply to the DC IN connector  
before removing the battery pack. You may lose  
timecode synchronization if you remove the  
battery pack first.  
4 GENLOCK IN connector  
To lock the timecode to an external  
source  
Camcorder synchronization during timecode  
synchronization  
During timecode synchronization, the camcorder  
is genlocked to the reference video signal input  
from the GENLOCK IN connector.  
1
2
Turn on the POWER switch.  
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK  
switch to PRESET.  
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to  
F-RUN.  
4
5
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
Supply a timecode signal and a  
reference video signal complying with  
the SMPTE standard and in proper  
phase relationship, to the TC IN  
connector and to the GENLOCK IN  
connector, respectively.  
Setting the Time Data  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO status screen  
This screen displays settings and status  
Checking Camcorder  
Settings and Status  
Information (Status  
Screens)  
information related to audio input and output.  
The status screens allow you to check camcorder  
settings and various types of status information.  
There are five status screens, listed below.  
CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4: Audio level meters  
and input sources  
Wind Filter: Wind filter settings  
Status screen  
Information displayed  
CAMERA status Settings and status information  
related to shooting  
VIDEO status screen  
This screen displays settings and status  
information related to recording and playback.  
AUDIO status  
Settings and status information  
related to audio input and  
output  
VIDEO status  
Settings and status information  
related to recording and  
playback  
ASSIGN  
Names of functions assigned  
to assignable switches  
Status of the battery mounted  
on the camcorder and the  
media status  
SWITCH status  
BATTERY/  
MEDIA status  
Video Format: Video format  
Rec Mode: Recording bit rate (HD mode only)  
Output&i.LINK: Output&i.LINK setting and  
i.LINK usage status  
SDI Output: HD/SD SDI OUT connector output  
setting  
HDMI Output: HDMI connector output setting  
Down Converter: SD output down converter  
setting (HD mode only)  
To display status screens  
With no menu is displayed, push the STATUS  
ON/SEL/OFF switch up to the ON/SEL side.  
Each push selects the next status screen, in the  
order given in the table above.  
CAMERA status screen  
This screen displays settings and status  
information related to shooting.  
ASSIGN SWITCH status screen  
This screen displays the names of the functions  
assigned to assignable switches  
White Bal: White balance status  
Gain: GAIN switch status  
Zoom Speed: Zoom speed set with the lens  
ZOOM button  
Zebra: Zebra status  
Skin Tone Detail: Skin details status  
Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information (Status Screens)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
               
BATTERY/MEDIA status screen  
This screen displays the status of the battery  
mounted on the camcorder and the media status.  
Battery: The remaining battery capacity  
Charge Count: The number of times the battery  
has been charged  
HDD A/HDD B: Remaining battery capacity of  
PHU-60K/120K/120R  
Media A/Media B:  
• Remaining capacity of media  
• Recordable time  
• Approximate writable lifetime (Life)  
“Life 100%” is shown for unused media.  
Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information (Status Screens)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
 
Chapter4 Shooting  
Notes on the use of S×S memory cards  
• Recorded data may be lost or corrupted in the  
following cases.  
Handling S×S Memory  
Cards  
- When the camcorder is subjected to shock or  
vibrations during reading, writing, or  
formatting of an S×S memory card, and when  
the camcorder is powered off or an S×S  
memory card is removed during reading,  
writing, or formatting  
- When the camcorder is used in an  
environment subject to static electricity or  
electric noise  
• Do not use or store S×S memory cards in  
locations that are:  
- Outside the specified environmental ranges  
- Very hot, such in as vehicles parked in the sun  
during summer, or exposed to direct sunlight,  
or near heaters  
This camcorder records video and audio on S×S  
memory cards (not supplied) loaded into one or  
both of its memory card slots.  
The PHU-60K/120K/120R Professional  
Harddisk Unit or MEAD-MS01 Media Adaptor  
can also be used for recording. For details, refer to  
the Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM  
(labeled “Manuals for Solid-State Memory  
Camcorder”).  
- Subject to high humidity and corrosion  
• When inserting a memory card, insert with the  
label side facing the correct direction.  
• Carry and store S×S memory cards in their  
cases, and lock the cases securely.  
About S×S Memory Cards  
S×S memory cards that can be used with  
this camcorder  
Use the following Sony S×S memory cards (S×S  
PRO or S×S-1) with this camcorder.  
S×S PRO  
• SBP-8 (8 GB)  
• SBP-16 (16 GB)  
• SBP-32 (32 GB)  
S×S-1  
SBS-32G1 (32 GB)  
• Guard against accidents and inadvertent data  
loss by backing up the data stored on S×S  
memory cards. Sony cannot be responsible for  
any consequences of damage to or loss of data  
stored on S×S memory cards.  
Proper operation cannot be guaranteed when  
memory cards other than S×S PRO and S×S-1 are  
used.  
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied  
labels in the designated label space. When  
attaching a label, make sure it does not protrude  
beyond the label space.  
The memory cards listed above comply with the  
ExpressCard memory card standard.  
• S×S, S×S PRO and S×S-1 are trademarks of  
Sony Corporation.  
• The ExpressCard label and logo are property of  
the Personal Computer Memory Card  
International Association (PCMCIA) and are  
licensed to Sony Corporation. Other trademarks  
and trade names are the property of their  
respective owners.  
Handling S×S Memory Cards  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Loading and Ejecting S×S Mem-  
ory Cards  
To load S×S memory cards  
Label space  
1
2
Slide the cover to the left to open.  
• Use this camcorder to format S×S memory  
cards that will be used with this camcorder.  
When memory cards are formatted on another  
unit, the format is regarded as an invalid format,  
making it necessary to format the memory cards  
again.  
Insert an S×S memory card into a card  
slot.  
However, note that the format and delete  
functions of this camcorder do not completely  
remove data from memory cards. Before  
discarding or disposing of a memory card, erase  
it using commercial data erasure software, or  
physically destroy it. Sony cannot be  
responsible for any failure to erase data  
completely.  
• Clip operations may not be possible when the  
remaining capacity of the media is low. In this  
case, use a computer to delete unneeded files  
and try again.  
• Open the memory card case completely before  
storing a card in the case or removing a card  
from the case.  
Insert with the label  
side facing right.  
The ACCESS lamp lights in orange, and then  
lights in green to indicate that the memory  
card is usable.  
3
Close the cover.  
ACCESS lamp status indications  
Card slots A and B each have an ACCESS lamp  
to indicate the slot status.  
Lamp  
Slot status  
Preventing accidental erasure  
You can prevent accidental recording, editing,  
and deletion of data on an S×S memory card by  
setting the write protect switch to the WP side.  
Lights in orange Accessing the S×S memory card  
(lights during data reading and  
writing)  
Lights in green Standby (the loaded S×S  
memory card is ready for  
recording or playback)  
Write protect switch  
• No S×S memory card is loaded.  
• An unusable card is loaded.  
• An S×S memory card is loaded,  
but the other slot is selected.  
Not lit  
Note  
Do not touch the write protect switch while an S×S  
memory card is loaded in a card slot. Eject the card  
before setting the write protect switch.  
Handling S×S Memory Cards  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The camcorder switches automatically to the  
other card if the selected card becomes full during  
recording.  
To eject S×S memory cards  
1
Open the cover, and then press the  
EJECT button to release the lock and  
pull the button out.  
Note  
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback.  
Even when pressed, it does not change the selected slot.  
Button operations are enabled when a thumbnail screen  
(see page 78) is displayed.  
Formatting (Initializing) S×S  
Memory Cards  
When you load an unformatted S×S memory  
card, or load an S×S memory card that has been  
formatted to other specifications, a message  
“Cannot Use Media(A)/Unsupported File  
System” appears in the viewfinder. In this case,  
format the memory card in the following way.  
Press the button once  
to release the lock.  
Note  
S×S memory cards must be formatted on an XDCAM  
EX device. Cards in other formats cannot be used.  
2
Press the EJECT button again to eject  
the card.  
To format (initialize) a memory card  
1
2
3
Select OPERATION >Format Media in  
the setup menu (see page 95).  
Select [Media(A)] (slot A) or [Media(B)]  
(slot B).  
Turn the MENU knob to select  
“Execute”, and then press the knob.  
The confirmation message for formatting is  
displayed on the viewfinder screen.  
Note  
4
Turn the MENU knob to select  
“Execute”, and press the knob.  
Execution of the format starts.  
Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the  
camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card  
is being accessed. Doing so may corrupt all data recorded  
on the card. Always make sure that the ACCESS lamp is  
lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or  
remove a memory card.  
During execution of the format, a progress  
indication appears (%), and the ACCESS lamp  
lights in orange.  
Recording and playback during format execution  
Even during execution of a format, recording and  
playback are possible using an S×S memory card  
loaded into the other card slot.  
Selecting the S×S Memory Card to  
Use  
If the format operation fails  
When S×S memory cards are loaded in both slot  
A and slot B, you can press the SLOT SELECT  
button to select the S×S memory card to use.  
A format operation may fail because the S×S  
memory card is write protected, or because it is  
not the type of card specified for use with this  
camcorder.  
Handling S×S Memory Cards  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
In this case, an error message appears. Following  
the instructions in the error message and  
exchange the card for an S×S memory card that  
can be used with this camcorder.  
Note  
About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one S×S  
memory card.  
The display of remaining recording time changes to “0”  
and the message “Media Full” appears when the clip  
limit is reached.  
Notes  
• All data is erased when you format a memory card,  
including setup files and all of the recorded video data.  
• Use the format function of this camcorder to format  
S×S memory cards for use on this camcorder. The  
formats of cards formatted on other devices are not  
recognized as valid formats, making it necessary to  
format them again on this camcorder.  
Restoring S×S Memory Cards  
If for any reason an error should occur in a  
memory card, the card must be restored before  
use.  
When you load an S×S memory card that needs to  
be restored, a message appears in the viewfinder  
to ask whether you want to restore it.  
Checking the Remaining  
Recording Time  
To restore a card  
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and  
then press the knob.  
You can check the remaining capacity of the S×S  
memory cards loaded in the two slots by checking  
the recording media remaining capacity display  
in the viewfinder.  
The restoration starts.  
During the restoration, a execution message  
appears, the progress is displayed (%), and the  
ACCESS lamp lights in orange.  
When the restoration finishes, a completion  
message is displayed for three seconds.  
If restoration fails  
The camcorder calculates the remaining  
• Write protected S×S memory cards and cards  
on which memory errors have occurred cannot  
be restored. A warning message appears for  
such cards. Follow the instructions in the  
message and unprotect the card or replace it  
with another card.  
recording time for the media in each slot on the  
basis of the current video format (recording bit  
rate), and displays it in units of minutes.  
You can also check the remaining time in the  
BATTERY/MEDIA status screen (see page 63).  
• S×S memory cards on which memory errors  
have occurred may become usable if they are  
reformatted.  
Note  
The  
protected.  
mark appears when a memory card is write  
• In some cases, some clips can be restored while  
others cannot. The restored clips can be played  
normally.  
• If the message “Could not Restore Some Clips”  
keeps appearing after repeated attempts at  
restoration, it may be possible to restore the S×S  
memory card with the following procedure.  
When to exchange S×S memory cards  
• The warning message “Media Near Full”  
appears, the WARNING indicator and the REC  
indication on the viewfinder screen flash, and  
the buzzer sounds when the total remaining  
recording time of the two memory cards falls to  
five minutes during recording.  
Exchange one of the cards for media with  
available recording capacity.  
• If you continue recording, the message “Media  
Full” appears and recording stops when the total  
remaining recording time falls to 0.  
1 Use the camcorder’s copy function  
(see page 85) or the supplied  
application software (see page 142) to  
copy the required clips to another S×S  
memory card.  
2 Format the unusable S×S memory card  
on the camcorder.  
Handling S×S Memory Cards  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 Copy the required clips back to the  
newly formatted S×S memory card.  
Basic Operations  
Recording and playback during restoration  
Even while restoration is in progress, you can  
record and play an S×S memory card in the other  
card slot.  
Note  
This section explains the basic shooting and  
recording procedures.  
Before starting to shoot, inspect the camera  
system to verify that it is operating properly.  
For restoration of media recorded with this camcorder,  
be sure to use this camcorder. Media recorded with a  
device other than this camcorder or with another  
camcorder of different version (even of the same model)  
may not be restored using this camcorder.  
1
2
Attach a fully charged battery pack (see  
Load one or two S×S memory cards (see  
If you load two cards, the camcorder  
switches automatically to the second card  
when the first card becomes full.  
3
4
Set the camcorder’s POWER switch  
Make the following settings.  
Marker display: On (see page 101)  
Iris: Auto (see page 54)  
Zoom: Auto (see page 55)  
Camera output: Select the picture currently  
being shot (camera picture), and turn the  
DCC function on (see page 17).  
Timecode advance mode: F-RUN (Free  
Run) or R-RUN (Rec Run) (see page 59)  
Audio input channel selection: Auto (see  
5
6
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the  
BLACK side to adjust the black balance  
Select a filter according to the lighting  
conditions, and adjust the white balance  
7
8
Point the camcorder at the subject, and  
adjust the focus (see page 55) and zoom.  
If you are using the electronic shutter,  
select an appropriate shutter mode and  
speed (see page 52).  
9
Do one of the following to start  
recording.  
Basic Operations  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
- Press the REC START button (see  
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 to continue  
recording.  
- Press the VTR button on the lens (see  
With each repetition, another clip is created  
on the memory card.  
- Turn on the assignable switch to which the  
Rec function has been assigned (see  
Clip 1  
Clip 2  
Clip 3  
During recording, the TALLY indicators, the  
tally indicator on the front panel of the  
viewfinder, and the REC indication on the  
viewfinder screen light. Adjust the zoom and  
focus as required.  
Notes  
• You cannot resume recording for about one second  
after stopping recording.  
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on  
one memory card is 600. Even if the memory card has  
enough free capacity to record more clips, when 600  
clips have been recorded, no further recording is  
possible.  
Notes  
• Never remove the battery pack while the  
camcorder is recording (while an ACCESS lamp  
is lit). Doing so risks the loss of several seconds  
of data before the recording was interrupted,  
because internal processing will not end  
normally.  
• The playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F  
FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) do  
not function during recording.  
Clip file sizes  
The XDCAM EX-series products limit the  
maximum file size of an HD clip to 4 GB and that  
of an SD clip to 2 GB.  
If you continue recording for an extended period,  
recorded materials may be segmented into  
multiple files, depending on the file size (the  
maximum number of partitions is 99).  
The camcorder regards continuous recording as  
one clip even if it has been segmented into  
multiple files.  
10 To stop recording, perform one of the  
operations listed in step 9.  
The TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on  
the front panel of the viewfinder, and the  
REC indication on the viewfinder screen go  
out, and camcorder enters recording standby  
(STBY) mode.  
A clip is created from the video and audio  
data and the metadata recorded between steps  
9 and 10.  
Clip names  
Eight-character clips names (consisting of a four-  
character prefix and a four-digit number) are  
generated automatically for clips recorded by this  
camcorder.  
Example: ABCD0001  
To check the recording (recording review)  
With the camcorder in recording standby  
(STBY) mode, turn on the assignable switch  
to which the Rec Review function or the  
Freeze Mix function has been assigned (see  
The camcorder plays the entire last clip, or  
the last few seconds of that clip (3 seconds or  
10 seconds), and then returns to standby  
mode.  
You can also use OPERATION >Clip >Title  
Prefix (see page 107) in the setup menu to set the  
clip name prefix to a user-specified string of  
characters (four to 46 characters in length). (A  
user-specified prefix cannot be changed after  
recording.)  
The four-digit number at the end of clip names is  
generated automatically, counting up in order as  
clips are recorded.  
You can use MAINTENANCE >Camera  
Config >Rec Review in the setup menu (see  
page 121) to change the playback time.  
When the Rec Review function is assigned to  
the RET button on the lens, you can also  
conduct a review by using the RET button.  
Playing Recorded Clips  
When the camcorder is in standby (STBY) mode,  
you can play all or part of the most recently  
recorded clip (see page 69).  
Basic Operations  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
1
2
Insert the S×S memory card to play (see  
2
Turn the MENU knob to select  
[Execute], and then press the knob. Or  
use the J or j button to select  
[Execute], and then press the SET  
button.  
Press the PREV button (see page 19) or  
the F REV button (see page 19) to cue  
up the clip to play.  
3
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.  
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator lights, and the  
playback picture appears in the viewfinder.  
To pause the playback  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.  
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes during  
pause.  
Press the button again to return to playback mode.  
To play at high speed  
Press the F FWD button (see page 19) or the  
F REV button (see page 19).  
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/  
PAUSE button.  
To switch between memory cards  
When two memory cards are loaded, press the  
SLOT SELECT button (see page 22) to select the  
active slot.  
It is not possible to switch between memory cards  
during playback.  
To end playback  
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the  
camcorder enters E-E mode.  
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback  
stops, and a thumbnail screen (see page 78)  
appears in the viewfinder.  
Playback also stops and the timecode screen  
appears in the viewfinder when you start  
recording during playback, and when you eject an  
S×S memory card.  
Deleting Recorded Clips  
You can use the assignable switches to delete the  
last recorded clips (Last Clip DEL function).  
You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to delete all  
recorded clips (All Clips DEL function) or to delete  
selected clips. For details, see “Deleting Clips”  
1
Turn on the assignable switch to which  
the Last Clip DEL function has been  
assigned (see page 130).  
A confirmation message appears.  
Basic Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
   
Advanced Operations  
To set OK marks  
After recording of a clip ends, turn on the  
assignable switch to which the OK Mark function  
has been assigned (see page 129). If the OK Mark  
function has been assigned to the RET button on  
the lens, press RET button on the lens.  
An OK mark is set in the most recently recorded  
clip, and an “OK Mark” indication appears in the  
viewfinder for about three seconds near the  
timecode indication.  
Recording Shot Marks  
On this camcorder, two types of shot marks are  
available in HD mode. You can record them at  
user-specified positions to make it easier for  
editors to cue up those positions. You can record  
up to 127 shot marks per clip.  
To delete OK marks  
1
If an OK mark has been set in the most  
recently recorded clip, turn on the  
assignable switch to which the OK  
Mark function has been assigned (see  
Note  
Shot marks cannot be recorded in SD mode.  
You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to add and  
delete shot marks in clips. For details, see “Adding  
If the OK Mark function has been  
assigned to the RET button on the lens,  
press RET button on the lens.  
A confirmation message appears.  
To record shot marks  
Do one of the following.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to select  
[Execute], and then press the knob.  
The OK mark is deleted from the most  
recently recorded clip.  
• Turn on an assignable switch to which Shot  
Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2 has been assigned (see  
• If Lens RET has been assigned to the RET  
button on the lens, operate as follows.  
To record shot mark 1: Press the RET button  
once.  
Starting to Record from Pre-  
stored Video (Picture Cache  
Function)  
To record shot mark 2: Press the RET button  
twice in quick succession.  
The camcorder is equipped with enough internal  
memory to pre-store up to 15 seconds of video  
and audio data in a picture cache. This allows you  
to begin recording a specified number of seconds  
in advance of the time when you press a recording  
start button.  
When a shot mark is recorded, a “Shot Mark 1” or  
“Shot Mark 2” indication appears in the  
viewfinder for about three seconds near the  
timecode indication.  
Setting OK Marks  
Selecting picture cache mode and setting  
the picture cache time  
Before recording in picture cache mode, you must  
select picture cache mode and set the picture  
cache time (the number of seconds of video and  
audio data stored to memory) in the  
To make it easier for editors to select good clips,  
you can set OK marks in clips recorded in HD  
mode.  
Notes  
• OK marks cannot be set in SD mode.  
• OK marks cannot be set or deleted during recording or  
playback.  
OPERATION menu.  
The picture cache time determines how far in  
advance you can start recording, counting back in  
seconds from the operation that starts recording.  
You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to add and  
delete OK marks in previously recorded clips. For  
Advanced Operations  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Note that it may not be possible to start this far in  
advance in the special cases explained in the  
following notes.  
switch to which the Picture Cache function has  
been assigned (see page 129).  
Camcorder data handling while recording in  
picture cache mode  
Notes  
Recording procedures in picture cache mode are  
basically the same as normal recording  
procedures. However, note the following  
differences with respect to how the camcorder  
handles video, time, and output data.  
• If you start recording while the media is being  
accessed, the start point of the video that is  
actually recorded may be later than the  
currently specified picture cache time. Because  
the delay increases as the number of recorded  
clips increases, you should avoid rapid start-  
and-stop recording operations in picture cache  
mode.  
• Storage of picture data to memory begins when you  
select picture cache mode. Therefore, if you start  
recording immediately after selecting picture cache  
mode, the picture data from before the selection is not  
recorded.  
• No data is recorded to picture cache memory during  
playback or recording review and display of  
thumbnails. It is not possible to record picture data  
from the time you were conducting playback or a  
recording review.  
To select picture cache mode and set the picture  
cache time  
Notes  
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/  
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the  
internal timecode generator is always F-RUN.  
• In picture cache mode, you cannot set time data  
by setting the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to  
SET.  
To set time data, exit picture cache mode.  
• If the remaining free capacity of the media in  
the currently selected slot is less than the picture  
cache time, and the media in the other slot has  
enough remaining capacity, then data is  
recorded to the media in the other slot.  
However, no data is recorded when there is no  
media in the other slot, and when the media in  
the other slot does not have enough remaining  
capacity. (A message appears in the viewfinder  
to inform you that there is not enough remaining  
capacity.)  
• Picture cache recording is not possible in Frame Rec,  
Interval Rec, and Slow & Quick Motion mode. The  
camcorder exits Frame Rec, Interval Rec, or Slow &  
Quick Motion mode whenever you select picture cache  
mode. The camcorder exits picture cache mode  
automatically whenever you select Frame Rec,  
Interval Rec, or Slow & Quick Motion mode.  
• The data stored in picture cache memory is cleared  
when you change the system settings, for example by  
selecting a different video format. Picture data from  
before the change is not recorded even if you start  
recording immediately after the change. The  
camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically.  
• It is not possible to set the picture cache time during  
recording.  
1
In the setup menu, select OPERATION  
>Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec.  
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu  
• Shot marks are not recorded if they are set  
before the recording start operation.  
• When you select a video format that supports  
i.LINK HDV output and play a clip that was  
recorded in picture cache mode, two or more  
frames with the same picture and timecode may  
follow on each other.  
• i.LINK output is possible during picture cache  
recording. However, the picture cache time is  
limited.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [On],  
and then press the knob.  
Select [P. Cache Rec Time], turn the  
MENU knob to select the desired  
picture cache time, and then press the  
knob.  
You can select from 0-2sec, 2-4sec, 4-6sec,  
6-8sec, 8-10sec, 10-12sec, 12-14sec, and  
13-15sec.  
If power is lost during recording  
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to  
OFF, the camcorder is powered off  
automatically after a few seconds, during which  
the media is accessed to record the video and  
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up  
to that point.  
Once made, picture cache mode settings remain  
in effect until changed.  
Instead of carrying out steps 1 and 2, you can also  
select picture cache mode by using an assignable  
Advanced Operations  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• The data stored in picture cache memory is cleared  
when you change the system settings, for example by  
selecting a different video format. Picture data from  
before the change is not recorded even if you start  
recording immediately after the change. The  
camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically.  
• Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during  
recording.  
• If power is lost because the battery was  
removed, the DC cable was disconnected, or the  
power was turned off on the AC adaptor side,  
then the video and audio data stored in memory  
is lost. The data stored in memory is not  
recorded. Be careful to avoid this when  
exchanging the battery.  
• Interval Rec is disabled when the following formats  
are selected.  
Recording Time-lapse Video  
(Interval Rec Function)  
- SP 1440/59.94i or SP 1440/50i, when the output  
setting is HD and OPERATION >Input/Output  
>i.LINK I/O in the setup menu is set to [Enable]  
- SP 1440/23.98P (pull-down recording)  
- Other than HQ 1920/23.98P or HQ 1280/23.98P,  
when the output setting is SD and OPERATION  
>Input/Output >i.LINK I/O in the setup menu is set  
to [Enable]  
The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows  
you to capture time-lapse video to the  
camcorder’s internal memory. This function is an  
effective way to shoot slow-moving subjects.  
When you start recording, the camcorder  
automatically records a specified number of  
frames at a specified interval time.  
To make Interval Rec settings  
1
2
Select OPERATION >Rec Function  
>Interval Rec in the setup menu.  
Interval time  
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu  
Turn the MENU knob to select [On],  
and then press the knob.  
The camcorder enters Interval Rec mode, the  
“Interval” indication on the viewfinder  
screen flashes.  
3
Select [Number of Frames], turn the  
MENU knob to select the number of  
frames to record in one take, and then  
press the knob.  
Number of frames in one take  
A pre-lighting function is available when Interval  
Rec is enabled. This function automatically turns  
on a video light before recording starts, which  
allows you to record pictures under stable light  
and color temperature conditions.  
You can select from 1, 3, 6, 9 (or from 2, 6,  
12 when the video format setting is 720/  
59.94P or 720/50P).  
4
5
Select [Interval Time], turn the MENU  
knob to select the desired interval, and  
then press the knob.  
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec,  
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, 1 to 4/6/12/24  
hour.  
Interval Rec settings and shooting  
Notes  
• The Interval Rec function cannot be used at the same  
time as the picture cache, Frame Rec, or Slow & Quick  
Motion function. When you select Interval Rec mode,  
the picture cache, Frame Rec, and Slow & Quick  
Motion functions are disabled. When you select  
picture cache, Frame Rec, or Slow & Quick Motion  
mode, the Interval Rec function is disabled.  
As required, select [Pre-Lighting], turn  
the MENU knob to select the length of  
lighting time before recording starts,  
and then press the knob.  
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec,  
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, 1 to 4/6/12/24  
hour.  
Advanced Operations  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• If you press the SLOT SELECT button, the  
camcorder completes recording of the specified  
number of frames, creates a clip, and switches  
to the other media.  
Notes  
• If you want to turn the video light on before the start of  
recording, set the camcorder’s LIGHT switch to  
[AUTO]. The video light’s switch must also be turned  
on. When this is done, the video light turns on and off  
automatically. However, the video light remains lit  
when the time that it is off is five seconds or less.  
• If you set the LIGHT switch to [MANUAL] and turn  
the video light’s switch on, the video light is always lit.  
(It does not go on and off automatically.)  
• Genlock is not possible.  
If power is lost during recording  
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to  
OFF, the camcorder is powered off  
automatically after a few seconds, during which  
the media is accessed to record the video and  
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up  
to that point.  
• If power is lost because the battery was  
removed, the DC cable was disconnected, or the  
power was turned off on the AC adaptor side,  
then the video and audio data shot up to that  
point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds). Be  
careful to avoid this when exchanging the  
battery.  
The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when it is  
powered off, but the number of frames, interval  
time, and pre-lighting settings are maintained.  
You do not need to set them again the next time  
you shoot in Interval Rec mode.  
To shoot in Interval Rec mode  
Make the settings and preparations described in  
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin  
shooting.  
Shooting Stop Motion Animations  
(Frame Rec Function)  
When recording starts, the “Interval” indication  
in the viewfinder changes from flashing to lit, and  
“INT REC” and “INT STBY” appear  
The Frame Rec function is useful for shooting  
stop motion animations, such as animations with  
puppets or clay figures.  
Each time that you press the recording start  
button, the camcorder shoots a specified number  
of frames and then stops.  
alternatively at the position of the REC  
indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally  
indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light  
as they do during normal recording.  
If you are using the pre-lighting function, the  
video light comes on before recording starts.  
To stop shooting  
Stop the recording.  
Frame Rec settings and shooting  
Notes  
When shooting ends, the video data stored in  
memory up to that point is written to the media.  
• The Frame Rec function cannot be used at the same  
time as the picture cache, Interval Rec, or Slow &  
Quick Motion function. When you select Frame Rec  
mode, the picture cache, Interval Rec, and Slow &  
Quick Motion functions are disabled. When you select  
picture cache, Interval Rec, or Slow & Quick Motion  
mode, the Frame Rec function is disabled.  
• The data stored in memory is cleared when you change  
the system settings, for example by selecting a  
different video format. Picture data from before the  
change is not recorded even if you start recording  
immediately after the change. The camcorder exits  
Frame Rec mode automatically.  
To exit Interval Rec mode  
Do one of the following.  
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.  
• With the camcorder in recording standby mode,  
set OPERATION >Rec Function >Interval Rec  
in the setup menu to “Off”.  
Limitations during recording  
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector cannot be  
used.  
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/  
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the  
internal timecode generator is always F-RUN.  
• Audio cannot be recorded.  
• Frame Rec settings cannot be changed during  
recording.  
• Frame Rec is disabled when the following formats are  
selected.  
- SP 1440/59.94i or SP 1440/50i, when the output  
setting is HD and OPERATION >Input/Output  
>i.LINK I/O in the setup menu is set to Enable  
• Recording review is not possible.  
Advanced Operations  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
- SP 1440/23.98P (pull-down recording)  
- Other than HQ 1920/23.98P or HQ 1280/23.98P,  
when the output setting is SD and OPERATION  
>Input/Output >i.LINK I/O in the setup menu is set  
to Enable  
• Set the POWER switch to OFF  
• With the camcorder in recording standby mode,  
set OPERATION >Rec Function >Interval Rec  
in the setup menu to “Off”.  
Limitations during recording  
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector cannot be  
To make Frame Rec settings  
used.  
1
2
Select OPERATION >Rec Function  
>Frame Rec in the setup menu.  
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/  
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the  
internal timecode generator is always R-RUN.  
• Audio cannot be recorded.  
• Recording review is not possible.  
• If you press the SLOT SELECT button, the  
camcorder completes recording of the specified  
number of frames, creates a clip, and switches  
to the other media.  
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu  
Turn the MENU knob to select [On],  
and then press the knob.  
The camcorder enters Frame Rec mode, the  
“Frame Rec” indication on the viewfinder  
screen flashes.  
• Genlock is not possible.  
3
Select [Number of Frames], turn the  
MENU knob to select the number of  
frames to record in one take, and then  
press the knob.  
You can select from 1, 3, 6, 9 (or from 2, 6,  
12 when the video format setting is 720/  
59.94P or 720/50P).  
If power is lost during recording  
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to  
OFF, the camcorder is powered off  
automatically after a few seconds, during which  
the media is accessed to record the video and  
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up  
to that point.  
• If power is lost because the battery was  
removed, the DC cable was disconnected, or the  
power was turned off on the AC adaptor side,  
then the video and audio data shot up to that  
point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds). Be  
careful to avoid this when exchanging the  
battery.  
The camcorder exits Frame Rec mode when it is  
powered off, but the setting for the number of  
frames setting is maintained. You do not need to  
set it again the next time you shoot in Frame Rec  
mode.  
To shoot in Frame Rec mode  
Make the settings and preparations described in  
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin  
shooting.  
Shooting with Slow & Quick  
Motion  
When the camcorder is in HD mode and the video  
format (see page 47) is set to one of the formats  
listed below, you can specify a recording frame  
rate that is different from the playback frame rate.  
When the Country setting is NTSC Area: HQ  
1920/29.97P, HQ 1920/23.98P, HQ 1280/  
59.94P, HQ 1280/29.97P, HQ 1280/23.98P  
When the Country setting is PAL Area: HQ  
1920/25P, HQ 1280/50P, HQ 1280/25P  
When recording starts, the “Frame Rec”  
indication in the viewfinder changes from  
flashing to lit, and “FRM REC” and “FRM  
STBY” appear alternatively at the position of the  
REC indication. The TALLY indicators and the  
tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder  
light as they do during normal recording.  
To stop shooting  
Stop the recording.  
By shooting with a frame rate that differs from the  
playback frame rate, you can obtain slow and  
quick motion effects that are smoother than low-  
speed or high-speed playback of content recorded  
at the normal frame rate.  
When shooting ends, the video data stored in  
memory up to that point is written to the media.  
To exit Interval Rec mode  
Do one of the following.  
Advanced Operations  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Example  
viewfinder by turning the MENU knob, or by  
using the J or j button and then pressing the  
SET button.  
The Slow & Quick Motion mode setting and the  
frame rate are retained even after the camcorder is  
powered off.  
When the video format is HQ 1280/23.98P, you  
can obtain quick-motion effects by setting the  
frame rate to 1 to 23, and obtain slow-motion  
effects by setting the frame rate to 25 to 60.  
Slow & Quick Motion settings and  
shooting  
To shoot in Slow & Quick Motion mode  
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”  
Notes  
• The Slow & Quick Motion function cannot be used at  
the same time as the picture cache, Interval Rec, or  
Frame Rec function. When you select Slow & Quick  
Motion mode, the picture cache, Interval Rec, and  
Frame Rec functions are disabled. When you select  
picture cache, Frame Rec, or Interval Rec mode, the  
Slow & Quick Motion function is disabled.  
When recording starts, the “S&Q STBY”  
indication in the viewfinder changes to the  
z S&Q REC” indication. The TALLY  
indicators and the tally indicator on the front  
panel of the viewfinder light as they do during  
normal recording.  
• Slow & Quick Motion is disabled when the slow  
shutter function (viewfinder display “SLS”) function is  
enabled. The slow shutter function is disabled when  
the Slow & Quick Motion function is enabled.  
• Slow & Quick Motion is disabled when OPERATION  
>Input/Output >i.LINK I/O in the setup menu is set to  
[Enable]. When Slow & Quick Motion is enabled,  
i.LINK I/O is fixed as [Disable].  
To stop shooting  
Stop the recording.  
Note  
It takes longer than normal for recording to stop when  
Frame Rate is set to a low value (for a slow frame rate).  
To exit Slow & Quick Motion mode  
With the camcorder in recording standby mode,  
set OPERATION >Rec Function > Slow & Quick  
in the setup menu to “Off”.  
• Slow & Quick Motion settings cannot be changed  
during recording.  
To make Slow & Quick Motion settings  
Limitations during recording  
1
2
Select OPERATION >Rec Function >  
Slow & Quick in the setup menu.  
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector cannot be  
used.  
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/  
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the  
internal timecode generator is always R-RUN.  
• Audio cannot be recorded when the recording  
and playback frame rates differ.  
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu  
Turn the MENU knob to select [On],  
and then press the knob.  
• Recording review is not possible.  
• If you change the recording frame rate to a value  
faster than the current shutter speed, the shutter  
speed is changed to the slowest value for which  
shooting is possible.  
The camcorder enters Slow & Quick Motion  
mode, and the “S&Q STBY” indication  
appears in the viewfinder.  
3
Select [Frame Rate], turn the MENU  
knob to select the recording frame rate,  
and then press the knob.  
Example: If the frame rate is 32 and the shutter  
1
speed is / , and you change the frame rate to  
40  
1
55, then the shutter speed is changed to /  
.
The setting range for the frame rate is as  
60  
If is not possible to select a shutter speed that is  
slower than the recording frame rate.  
• Genlock is not possible.  
follows.  
System lines  
1080  
Frame rate  
1 to 30  
720  
1 to 60  
When you finish making these settings, the  
system frequency and the frame rate appear at the  
top of the viewfinder screen. You can change the  
frame rate while viewing the display in the  
Advanced Operations  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Framing Shots with the Freeze  
Mix Function  
The freeze mix function allows you to  
temporarily overlap a still image (freeze picture)  
from a clip shot in HD mode onto the current  
camera picture. This makes it easier to frame the  
shot.  
Note  
The freeze mix function is not available in the following  
cases.  
• When the recording format is SP 1440/23.98P  
• When the video formats of the recorded picture and the  
camera picture differ  
• When you are shooting in Slow & Quick Motion mode  
or slow shutter mode  
• When there is i.LINK input  
To display a freeze mix picture  
1
Play a clip or conduct a recording  
review of a clip with the same format as  
the camera picture.  
2
Display the picture that you want to use  
as the frame, and then turn on the  
assignable switch to which the Freeze  
Mix function has been assigned.  
The recording review picture is frozen and  
overlaps the camera picture.  
Note  
The following functions are disabled at the freeze mix  
times.  
• Menu operations  
• During Focus Mag display  
• Marker display  
• Zebra display  
• Peaking display  
• Skin tone details display  
To cancel the freeze mix display  
Do one of the following.  
• Press an assignable switch again to which the  
Freeze Mix function has been assigned.  
The freeze mix display is canceled and the  
display returns to the normal camera picture.  
• Start recording (see page 68).  
Normal recording starts.  
Advanced Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
     
Chapter5 Clip Operations  
Clip Playback  
A thumbnail screen appears if you press the THUMBNAIL button in E-E or playback mode. Thumbnail  
screens display lists of the clips stored on S×S memory cards in the form of index pictures. (A message  
appears if you insert a memory card that contains no clips.)  
You can select any clip (see page 80) in a thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip (see page 80).  
Thumbnail Screen  
In thumbnail screens, the timecode of the index picture appears beneath the thumbnail for each clip. (An  
OK mark also appears when a clip has been marked with an OK mark.)  
Note  
Normal thumbnail screens display SD clips only or HD clips only, even if the S×S memory card contains clips in both  
formats. You can select the format to display by selecting a mode with OPERATION >Format >HD/SD (see page 94) in  
the setup menu.  
If you want to display all recorded clips, regardless of the HD/SD mode, switch to the all clips thumbnail screen.  
However, it is not possible to start playback from the all clips thumbnail screen (see page 83).  
HD mode thumbnail screen  
Cursor (yellow)  
The icon of the currently selected S×S memory card is highlighted.  
(If the card is write protected, a lock appears on the left.)  
Clip number/Number of clips  
Clip Playback  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
a Index picture  
f Video format of recording  
When a clip is recorded, its first frame is set  
automatically as the index picture. You can  
change to index picture to any frame (see  
g Special recording information  
This displays the mode of clips that have been  
recorded in a special mode (Slow & Quick  
Motion, Interval Rec, Frame Rec).  
b Lock mark  
Indicates the selected clip is marked with an OK  
mark and protected.  
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the frame rates  
are displayed to the right as [Recording frame  
rate/Playback frame rate] fps.  
h OK mark  
An OK mark appears only when the clip has been  
marked with an OK mark (see page 85).  
c Date and start time of recording  
d Clip name  
e Independent AV file icon  
i File format  
This appears only when a clip is an independent  
AV file. S×S memory cards may contain  
Indicates the file format of the selected clip  
(MP4).  
independent files that have been added directly  
from a computer. Because independent files lack  
the associated management files, some operations  
and information displays may not be available.  
j Clip duration  
k Timecode  
This is the timecode of the index picture.  
SD mode thumbnail screen  
The icon of the currently selected S×S memory card is highlighted.  
(If the card is write protected, a lock appears on the left.)  
Cursor (yellow)  
Clip number/Number of components  
a Take mark  
b Index picture  
Indicates that the file size is larger than 2 GB, and  
that the clip has been split before being saved.  
You can check the segment files on the expand  
thumbnail screen (see page 87).  
When a clip is recorded, its first frame is set  
automatically as the index picture.  
Clip Playback  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
c Date and start time of recording  
To play clips sequentially starting from a  
selected clip  
d Clip name/Number of components  
The number after the clip name (delimited by /) is  
the number of components. This appears only for  
clips larger than 2 GB in size, which have been  
split into smaller files for storage.  
1
2
Select the thumbnail of the clip that you  
want to play first.  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.  
Play begins from the top of the selected clip.  
e Video format of recording  
f File format  
Indicates the file format of the selected clip  
(AVI).  
Play continues through all clips after the selected  
clip.  
When the last clip has been played to the end, the  
camcorder enters pause (still image) mode at the  
last frame of the last clip.  
g Clip duration  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the  
thumbnail screen.  
h Timecode  
This is the timecode of the index picture.  
Notes  
• There may be momentary picture breakup or still  
image display at the transition from one clip to another.  
During this time, the playback controls and the  
THUMBNAIL button cannot be operated.  
To switch between S×S memory cards  
When two S×S memory cards are loaded, you can  
switch between them by pressing the SLOT  
SELECT button.  
• When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and  
begin playback, there may be momentary picture  
breakup at the top of the clip. To view the top of the  
clip without breakup, put the camcorder into playback  
mode, pause, use the PREV button to return to the top  
of the clip, and start playback again.  
• On S×S memory cards that contain both HD-mode and  
SD-mode clips, you cannot play all clips in sequence.  
For example, while an HD mode thumbnail screen is  
displayed, only HD mode clips are played in sequence.  
Note  
Switching between memory cards is possible only in the  
normal thumbnail screen, the OK clip thumbnail screen,  
or the all clips thumbnail screen, or when you have  
pressed the STOP button to display the camera picture.  
To hide the thumbnail screen  
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
To pause playback  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.  
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while  
playback is paused.  
Playing Clips  
Press the button again to return to playback mode.  
To select clip thumbnails  
To play at high speed  
Do one of the following to move the yellow  
cursor to the clip that you want to select.  
• Press an arrow button (J, j, K, k).  
• Turn the MENU knob.  
Press the F FWD button (see page 19) or the  
F REV button (see page 19).  
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/  
PAUSE button.  
• Press the PREV or NEXT button.  
To stop playback  
Press the STOP button: Playback stops and the  
To select the first thumbnail  
With the F REV button held down, press the  
PREV button.  
camcorder enters E-E mode.  
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops  
and the thumbnail screen (see page 78)  
appears in the viewfinder.  
To select the last thumbnail  
With the F FWD button held down, press the  
NEXT button.  
Playback also stops if you eject the memory card.  
In this case, the camera picture appears in the  
viewfinder.  
Clip Playback  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
select clip thumbnails (see page 80) and to start  
clip playback (see page 80).  
To cue up clips  
To return to the top of the current clip  
Press the PREV button.  
To search for scenes in clips with the  
expand thumbnail screen  
The expand thumbnail screen is convenient when  
you want to find and cue up a specific scene in a  
long clip.  
To display the expand thumbnail screen, select a  
clip in the thumbnail screen and press the  
EXPAND button (see page 19) or select  
THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View >Forward  
Expansion in the setup menu. The selected clip is  
displayed as follows.  
• During playback or F FWD, this jumps to the  
top of the current clip and starts playback.  
• During F REV or pause, this jumps to the top of  
the current clip and displays a still image.  
• Each subsequent press of the button moves to  
the previous clip.  
To play from the top of the first clip  
Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV  
buttons. This jumps to the top of the first clip on  
the S×S memory card.  
HD mode: The clip is divided into 12 equally-  
sized blocks, and a thumbnail of the first  
frame in each block is displayed.  
SD mode: Only in the case of clips that have been  
split into partial files because the file size was  
larger than 2 GB, a thumbnail of the first  
frame of each partial file is displayed.  
To jump to the top of the next clip  
Press the NEXT button.  
• During playback or F FWD, this jumps to the  
top of the next clip and starts playback.  
• During F REV or pause, this jumps to the top of  
the next clip and displays a still image.  
• Each subsequent press of the button moves to  
the next clip.  
This helps you to quickly cue up to a desired  
scene in a clip of long duration.  
To play from the top of the last clip  
Simultaneously press the NEXT and F FWD  
buttons. This jumps to the top of the last clip on  
the S×S memory card.  
(page 87) for more information about the expand  
thumbnail screen.  
To add a shot mark during playback  
(HD mode only)  
You can add shot marks to clips during playback  
by using the same method used during recording  
To search for shot marks in clips with the  
shot mark thumbnail screen (HD mode)  
When a clip contains one or more shot marks, you  
can easily find them with the shot mark thumbnail  
screen. The shot mark thumbnail screen displays  
a thumbnail of each shot mark frame in the clip.  
To display the shot mark thumbnail screen, press  
the ESSENCE MARK button (see page 21) or  
select THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View >  
Notes  
• Shot marks cannot be recorded when the S×S memory  
card is write protected.  
• Shot marks cannot be added at the first or last frame of  
a clip.  
Essence Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.  
(HD Mode Only)” (page 88) for more information  
about the shot mark thumbnail screen.  
Using Thumbnails to Search  
Inside Clips  
You can switch a thumbnail screen to the  
following thumbnail search screens, which allow  
you quickly find the clips you want.  
• Expand thumbnail screen  
• Shot mark thumbnail screen (HD mode only)  
Like the normal thumbnail screen and the OK clip  
thumbnail screen, these screens allow you to  
Clip Playback  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Thumbnail Operations  
You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to perform various operations on clips, to check clip properties, and  
to change clip metadata.  
THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration  
Menu items  
Sub-items  
Description  
Clip Properties  
Displays detailed properties (see page 84)  
a)  
Changes index pictures in the expand thumbnail screen or  
the shot mark thumbnail screen (see page 89)  
Set Index Picture  
• Displays the expand thumbnail screen (see page 87)  
• In the expand thumbnail screen, increases the number of  
Thumbnail View  
Forward Expansion  
Back Expansion  
In the expand thumbnail screen, decreases the number of  
divisions  
a)  
Displays the shot mark thumbnail screen (see page 88)  
Essence Mark Thumbnail  
Clip Thumbnail  
Displays the normal thumbnail screen  
All Clip Thumbnail  
Add Shot Mark1  
Displays the all clips thumbnail screen (see page 83)  
a)  
In the expand thumbnail screen or the shot mark thumbnail  
screen, adds a Shot Mark1 mark (see page 88)  
Set Shot Mark  
Delete Shot Mark1  
Add Shot Mark2  
Delete Shot Mark2  
In the expand thumbnail screen or the shot mark thumbnail  
screen, deletes a Shot Mark1 mark (see page 89)  
In the expand thumbnail screen or the shot mark thumbnail  
screen, adds a Shot Mark2 mark (see page 88)  
In the expand thumbnail screen or the shot mark thumbnail  
screen, deletes a Shot Mark2 mark (see page 89)  
a)  
Adds an OK mark and protects a clip (see page 85)  
Add OK Mark  
a)  
Deletes an OK mark and unprotects a clip (see page 85)  
Delete OK Mark  
Copy Clip  
Copies a clip (see page 85)  
Deletes a clip (see page 86)  
Divides a clip (see page 89)  
Delete Clip  
a)  
Divide Clip  
a)  
Displays the OK clip thumbnail screen (see page 83)  
Filter Clips  
Copy All Clips  
Delete All Clips  
a) HD mode only  
Execute/Cancel  
Execute/Cancel  
Copies all clips (see page 86)  
Deletes all unprotected clips (see page 86)  
Thumbnail Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
       
To hide the clip properties screen  
Do one of the following.  
Press the RESET/RETURN button: This  
returns to the THUMBNAIL menu.  
Press the THUMBNAIL button: The  
camcorder enters E-E mode, and the camera  
picture appears.  
Basic THUMBNAIL Menu  
Operations  
information about menu operations.  
To display the THUMBNAIL menu  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button: Playback from  
the selected clip starts.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON,  
or press the MENU button.  
Changing the Thumbnail Screen  
Type  
Turn the MENU knob to select “TH”,  
and then press the knob. Or press the J  
or j button to select “TH”, and then  
press the SET button.  
To display OK clip thumbnails (HD mode  
only)  
The THUMBNAIL menu appears.  
From among all clips stored on the currently  
selected S×S memory card, the OK clip  
thumbnail screen displays only clips which have  
been marked with an OK mark.  
When the normal thumbnail screen is displayed,  
you can select THUMBNAIL >Filter Clips to  
switch to the OK clip thumbnail screen.  
To hide the THUMBNAIL menu, press the  
MENU button again.  
Only)” (page 85) for information about how to add  
OK marks.  
To select menu items and sub-items  
Do one of the following.  
• Turn the MENU knob to select an item or sub-  
item, and then press the knob.  
• Press the arrow buttons (J, j, K, k) to  
select an item or sub-item, and then press the  
SET button.  
According to the selected item or sub-item, a  
selection list or a clip properties screen appears  
To display the all clips thumbnail screen  
The all clips thumbnail screen displays  
thumbnails of all of the clips on the selected  
memory card, including both HD-mode and  
SD-mode clips. This is useful when you want to  
check whether the memory card contains clips in  
another mode.  
You can switch to the all clips thumbnail screen  
by selecting THUMBNAIL >All Clip Thumbnail  
in the setup menu in the normal thumbnails  
screen.  
To return to the previous state, push the MENU  
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the  
ESCAPE side.  
Notes  
Pressing the RESET/RETURN button returns  
you to the normal thumbnails screen, where you  
can perform playback and other clip operations.  
• When an S×S memory card is write protected, it is not  
possible to copy, delete, or divide clips, to change  
index pictures, or to add and delete OK marks and shot  
marks.  
• Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state  
of the camcorder when the menu was displayed.  
Note  
You cannot start playback from the all clips thumbnail  
screen.  
Thumbnail Operations  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Displaying Clip Properties  
The clip properties screen appears when you select Clip Properties in the THUMBNAIL menu.  
HD mode  
SD mode  
When clip names are 12 characters or longer,  
only the first five characters and the last five  
characters are displayed. If you want to check  
the abbreviated characters, press the MENU  
knob to switch to long display mode. In long  
display mode, up to 53 characters are displayed  
in clip names.  
a Image of the current clip  
b Image of the previous clip  
Press the PREV button to display the properties  
of the previous clip.  
c Image of the next clip  
Press the NEXT button to display the properties  
of the next clip.  
Press the MENU knob again to exit long  
display mode. Pressing the PREV or NEXT  
button to display the previous or next clip also  
exists long display mode.  
d Clip name  
In SD mode, only for clips that have been  
divided because the file size was greater than 2  
GB, the number of component clips appears  
after the clip name.  
Thumbnail Operations  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The screen changes to the clip properties  
screen, and a confirmation message appears  
beneath the index picture.  
e Lock mark (HD mode only)  
This appears when the clip is marked with an  
OK mark and protected.  
2
Select [Execute], and press the MENU  
knob.  
f OK mark (HD mode only)  
This appears only when an OK mark has been  
added.  
An OK mark is added to the selected clip.  
g Date and start time of recording  
To delete an OK mark  
A Delete OK Mark item appears in the  
THUMBNAIL menu when you have selected a  
clip that has an OK mark.  
h File format  
The file format of the clip (MP4 or AVI)  
appears.  
i Special recording information (HD  
mode only)  
1
In the thumbnail screen, select  
THUMBNAIL >Delete OK Mark.  
The screen changes to the clip properties  
screen, and a confirmation message appears  
beneath the index picture.  
This displays the mode of clips that have been  
recorded in a special mode (Slow & Quick  
Motion, Interval Rec, Frame Rec).  
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the frame rates  
are displayed to the right as [Recording frame  
rate/Playback frame rate].  
2
Select [Execute], and press the MENU  
knob.  
The OK mark is deleted from the selected clip.  
j Timecode of the displayed image  
k Timecode of the recording start point  
l Timecode of the recording end point  
m Duration  
Copying Clips  
You can copy clips to other S×S memory cards.  
Clips are copied to destination S×S memory cards  
using the same names as the original clips.  
n Recorded audio channels  
o Video format of recording  
Notes  
• If a clip with the same name already exists at the copy  
destination S×S memory card, a one-digit number in  
parentheses is added to the original name.  
The number in parentheses is the smallest number that  
does not exist at the copy destination.  
Adding and Deleting OK Marks  
(HD Mode Only)  
Examples:  
ABCD0002tABCD0002(1)  
ABCD0002(1)tABCD0002(2)  
ABCD0005(3)tABCD0005(4)  
You can add OK marks to clips. This makes it  
possible to display thumbnails of only the clips  
that you need by pressing the THUMBNAIL  
button.  
Clips with OK marks cannot be deleted or  
divided. If you want to delete or divide such a  
clip, delete the OK mark first.  
• If the parenthetical numbers (1) to (9) already exist at  
the copy destination, it is not possible to copy any more  
clips under that name. (A tenth clip cannot be copied.)  
• A message appears if there is not enough free capacity  
at the copy destination S×S memory card. Exchange  
the card for one with more free capacity.  
• When multiple clips are copied from a source SxS  
memory card, it may not be possible to copy all clips  
to the end. Depending on memory characteristics and  
usage of the memory cards, this can occur even when  
the source and destination memory cards have the  
same capacity.  
To add an OK mark  
1
In the thumbnail screen, select  
THUMBNAIL >Add OK Mark.  
Thumbnail Operations  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
1
2
In the thumbnail screen, select the  
thumbnail of the clip to copy, and then  
select THUMBNAIL >Copy Clip.  
The screen changes to the properties screen  
of that clip, and a confirmation message  
appears beneath the index picture.  
Deleting Clips  
You can delete clips from S×S memory cards.  
Note  
HD clips with OK marks cannot be deleted.  
If you want to delete such clips, first delete the OK marks  
Select [Execute], and press the MENU  
knob.  
The copy starts.  
1
2
In the thumbnail screen, select the  
thumbnail of the clip to delete, and then  
select THUMBNAIL >Delete Clip.  
The screen changes to the properties screen  
of that clip, and a confirmation message  
appears beneath the index picture.  
During the copy, an execution message and  
progress bar are displayed.  
When the copy finishes, the display returns to the  
thumbnail screen.  
To cancel a copy operation  
Select [Execute], and press the MENU  
knob.  
The clip is deleted.  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
The copy is cancelled, and the display returns to  
the thumbnail screen.  
In the thumbnail screen, the clips that followed  
the deleted clip move up one position.  
To batch copy groups of clips  
You can batch copy groups of clips from one S×S  
memory card to another S×S memory card.  
When both HD-mode and SD-mode clips exist on  
the source S×S memory card, only clips in the  
currently selected mode are copied. This is a  
convenient way to extract clips in one of the  
modes.  
To batch delete groups of clips  
You can batch delete groups of clips from an S×S  
memory card.  
Notes  
• When both HD-mode and SD-mode clips exist on the  
S×S memory card, only clips in the currently selected  
mode are deleted.  
1
In the thumbnail screen, select the  
thumbnails of the clips to copy and then  
select THUMBNAIL >Copy All Clips.  
The confirmation message “Copy All Clip?”  
appears.  
• In HD mode, clips with OK marks are not deleted,  
even when a deletion is executed for a group of clips  
that includes them.  
1
2
In the thumbnail screen, select the  
thumbnails of the clips to delete and  
then select THUMBNAIL >Delete All  
Clips.  
The confirmation message “Delete All  
Clips?” appears.  
2
Select [Execute], and press the MENU  
knob.  
The copy starts.  
During the copy, the progress of the copy is  
displayed.  
If you executed the copy in HD mode, only  
HD-mode clips are copied.  
If you executed the copy in SD mode, only  
SD-mode clips are copied.  
Select [Execute], and press the MENU  
knob.  
The deletion starts.  
During the deletion, the progress of the  
deletion is displayed.  
To cancel the copy operation  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
If you executed the deletion in HD mode,  
only HD-mode clips are deleted.  
If you executed the deletion in SD mode,  
only SD-mode clips are deleted.  
When the copy finishes  
A completion message appears, and the  
THUMBNAIL menu screen appears again.  
Thumbnail Operations  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To cancel the deletion  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
Index picture  
When the deletion finishes  
A completion message appears, and the  
THUMBNAIL menu screen appears again.  
Frame with Shot Mark1  
Frame with Shot Mark2  
S1  
S2  
The same icons are also displayed beneath the  
thumbnails. However, when several icons could  
be displayed for the same frame, one icon is  
selected for display, in the order of priority  
Index picture > Shot Mark1 > Shot Mark2.  
Displaying the Expand Thumbnail  
Screen  
The expand thumbnail screen allows you to  
search inside clips by using thumbnails (see  
page 81), to change index pictures (see page 89),  
and to add and delete shot marks (see page 88).  
b Timecode  
This displays the timecode of the selected  
To display the screen  
frame in the expand thumbnail screen.  
In the thumbnail screen, select a thumbnail and  
press the EXPAND button (see page 19) or select  
THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View >Forward  
Expansion.  
An expand thumbnail screen for the selected clip  
appears.  
Expand thumbnail screen in SD mode  
In SD mode, only in the case of clips that have  
been split into partial files because the file size  
was larger than 2 GB, a thumbnail of the first  
frame of each partial file is displayed.  
Expand thumbnail screen in HD mode  
Number of the selected frame  
In HD mode, the selected clip is divided into 12  
equally-sized blocks, and a thumbnail of the first  
frame in each block is displayed.  
Number of the selected frame  
S1  
S2  
Clip properties are displayed at the bottom of the  
screen.  
S2  
S1  
Except for the items listed below, the information  
displayed here is the same as the information  
displayed in the normal thumbnail screen.  
Clip properties are shown at the bottom of the  
screen.  
Except for the items listed below, the information  
displayed here is the same as the information  
displayed in the normal thumbnail screen.  
a Timecode  
This is the timecode of the selected partial file.  
b Duration  
This is the duration of the selected partial file.  
a Frame information  
This displays frame information using icons.  
To increase the number of divisions  
When you press the EXPAND button, or select  
THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View >Forward  
Expansion, the divided clip or file is further  
Thumbnail Operations  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
divided into 12 equally-sized blocks (a clip or file  
that has been divided into 12 is further divided  
into 12, for 12 × 12 = 144 divisions). You can  
repeat the same operation to increase the number  
of division.  
Example shot mark thumbnail screen  
(with Shot Mark selected)  
To return to the previous division level  
S1  
S2  
S2  
S1  
Press the EXPAND button with the SHIFT button  
held down, or select THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail  
View >Back Expansion. The expand thumbnail  
screen returns to the previous division level.  
S1  
S1  
Displaying the Shot Mark  
Thumbnail Screen (HD Mode  
Only)  
The properties of the clip appear at the bottom of  
the screen.  
Except for the following item, the information  
displayed here is the same as the information  
displayed in the expand thumbnail screen.  
In the shot mark thumbnail screen (shown only in  
HD mode), you can search for shot marks in clips  
(see page 81), change index pictures (see  
page 89), and add and delete shot marks (see  
a Timecode  
This is the timecode of the selected frame in the  
1
In the thumbnail screen, select the  
thumbnail of a clip, and press the  
ESSENCE MARK button (see page 21)  
or select THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail  
View >Essence Mark Thumbnail.  
shot mark thumbnail screen.  
Adding and Deleting Shot Marks  
(HD Mode Only)  
2
3
The shot mark thumbnail screen  
appears, and a selection list is displayed.  
In the shot mark thumbnail screen (see page 88)  
or the expand thumbnail screen (see page 87),  
you can add thumbnails to any frame of clips  
recorded in HD mode, and delete recorded shot  
marks.  
Select Shot Mark, Shot Mark1, or Shot  
Mark2.  
Shot Mark1: Display only frames marked  
with Shot Mark1 marks.  
Shot Mark2: Display only frames marked  
with Shot Mark2 marks.  
To add shot marks  
Shot Mark: Display frames marked with  
either Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2 marks.  
1
Select the frame where you want to add  
a shot mark, and then select  
THUMBNAIL > Set Shot Mark > Add  
Shot Mark1 (or Add Shot Mark2).  
The properties screen of the selected frame  
appears, and a confirmation message appears  
below the image.  
2
Select [Execute], and press the MENU  
knob.  
Thumbnail Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
           
The properties screen of the selected frame  
appears, and a confirmation message appears  
below the image.  
To delete shot marks  
1
Select the frame where you want to  
delete a shot mark, and then select  
THUMBNAIL > Set Shot Mark >  
Delete Shot Mark1 (or Delete Shot  
Mark2).  
2
Select [Execute], and press the MENU  
knob.  
The clip is divided at the selected frame, and  
two clips with different names are created.  
The properties screen of the selected frame  
appears, and a confirmation message appears  
below the image.  
The first four characters of the clip name are  
taken from the name of the original clips, and the  
last four characters are new serial numbers.  
2
Select [Execute], and press the MENU  
knob.  
Example: When the name of a newly recorded  
clip would be EFGH0100, and a clip named  
ABCD0002 is divided, the names of the two  
newly created clips are ABCD0100 and  
ABCD0101.  
Changing Clip Index Pictures  
(HD Mode Only)  
Note  
In the shot mark thumbnail screen (see page 88)  
or the expand thumbnail screen (see page 87),  
you can set the selected frame as the clip index  
picture in HD mode.  
When there is not enough remaining capacity on the S×S  
memory cards to store the divided clips, a message  
appears to inform you that there is not enough capacity.  
1
Select the thumbnail of the frame that  
you want to use as the index picture,  
and then select THUMBNAIL >Set  
Index Picture.  
The properties screen of the selected frame  
appears, and a confirmation message appears  
below the image.  
2
Select [Execute], and press the MENU  
knob.  
Note  
Even if you set the index picture to a frame that is not the  
first frame of a clip, playback of that clip from a  
thumbnail screen always begins at the first frame.  
Dividing Clips (HD Mode Only)  
In the expand thumbnail screen (see page 87) and  
the shot mark thumbnail screen (see page 88) ,  
HD-mode clips can be divided into two clips at  
the selected frame.  
1
Select the thumbnail of the frame where  
you want to divide the clip, and then  
select THUMBNAIL >Divide Clip.  
Thumbnail Operations  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter6  
Menu and Detailed Settings  
OPERATION Menu (see page 94)  
Setup Menu  
OPERATION  
Format  
Organization and Levels  
Format Media  
Input/Output  
Super Impose  
Rec Function  
Assignable SW  
VF Setting  
Marker  
On this camcorder, settings for shooting and  
playback are made in the setup menu, which  
appears in the viewfinder.  
The setup menu can also be displayed on an  
external video monitor (see page 139).  
Gain Switch  
TLCS  
Zebra  
Setup Menu Organization  
Display On/Off  
Auto Iris  
The setup menu consists of the following menus.  
White Setting  
Offset White  
Shutter Select  
Time Zone  
Clip  
Op: OPERATION menu  
Settings related to shooting, except settings  
related to picture quality (see page 94)  
Pa: PAINT menu  
Settings related to picture quality (see page 108)  
Th: THUMBNAIL menu  
Settings related to clip thumbnails (see page 82)  
Note  
The THUMBNAIL menu is used only when a thumbnail  
screen (see page 78) is displayed. It is disabled when no  
thumbnail screen is displayed.  
Ma: MAINTENANCE menu  
Settings related to audio and timecode (see  
Fi: FILE menu  
Settings related to file operations (see page 125)  
Setup Menu Levels  
for the organization of the THUMBNAIL menu.  
Setup Menu Organization and Levels  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
PAINT  
Basic Setup Menu  
Operations  
Switch Status  
White  
Black  
Flare  
Gamma  
Black Gamma  
Knee  
To display the setup menu  
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press  
the MENU button.  
The camcorder enters menu mode and the menu  
list appears on the screen.  
A cursor appears over the first two characters of the  
most recently used menu, and the corresponding  
menu item selection area appears to the right.  
White Clip  
Detail(HD Mode)  
Detail(SD Mode)  
Aperture  
Skin Detail  
Matrix  
Example: When the cursor is positioned at the  
OPERATION menu  
Multi Matrix  
V Modulation  
Low Key Saturation  
Menu list  
MAINTENANCE Menu (see page 114)  
MAINTENANCE  
White Shading  
Battery  
Audio  
WRR Setting  
Timecode  
Menu item selection area  
Essence Mark  
Camera Config  
Preset White  
White Filter  
Auto Iris2  
Note  
The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder is in  
focus magnification mode. Exit focus magnification  
mode by pressing the assignable switch to which the  
Focus Mag function has been assigned.  
Flicker Reduce  
Genlock  
To make menu settings  
ND Comp  
Lens  
1
2
Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or  
j button, to move the cursor to the item  
that you want to set.  
A list of selectable menu items appears in the  
menu item selection area to the right of the  
icon.  
Trigger Mode  
Clock set  
Language  
Hours Meter  
Version  
Press the MENU knob or the SET  
button.  
The cursor moves to the menu item selection  
area.  
FILE  
All  
Scene  
Reference  
Lens  
You can also move the cursor to the menu  
item selection area by pressing the k  
button.  
Basic Setup Menu Operations  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• The menu item selection area displays a  
maximum of seven lines. You can scroll  
through menus with more than seven lines  
by moving the cursor up and down.  
Triangles appear at the upper right and  
lower right of the menu item selection area  
to indicate that a menu is scrollable.  
4
Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or  
j button, to move the cursor to the sub-  
item that you want to set, and then  
confirm the selection by pressing the  
MENU knob or the SET button.  
The settings of the selected sub-item appear,  
and the cursor moves to the currently  
selected value.  
NTSC Area  
Appears when more menu items  
are available below the last line.  
(v appears when more menu items  
are available above the first line.)  
Settings area  
• The settings area displays a maximum of  
seven lines. You can scroll through menus  
with more than seven sub-items by moving  
the cursor up and down. Triangles appear at  
the upper right and lower right of the  
settings area to indicate that a sub-item  
menu is scrollable.  
Menu item selection area  
B appears to the right when more detailed  
sub-items are available.  
Settings appear to the right when a menu  
item has no sub-items.  
You can select  
previous level.  
to return to the  
• For sub-items with a large settings range  
(for example, –99 to +99), the settings area  
is not displayed. Instead, the sub-item name  
is highlighted to indicate that the sub-item  
can be set.  
3
Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or  
j button, to move the cursor to the item  
that you want to set, and then confirm  
by pressing the MENU knob or the SET  
button.  
The sub-items area appears to the right of the  
menu item selection area, and the cursor  
moves to the first sub-item.  
5
Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or  
j button, to select the value to set, and  
then confirm by pressing the MENU  
knob or the SET button.  
The setting is changed, and the display is  
updated to show the new setting.  
If you select [Execute] for an executable  
item, the corresponding function is executed.  
Items that require confirmation before execution  
In step 3, the menu disappears and a confirmation  
message appears if you select an item that  
requires confirmation before execution. Follow  
the instructions in the message to execute or  
cancel the operation.  
Sub-items area  
• Displays sub-items and their current  
settings  
• To return to the previous level, select  
,
press the K button, or push the MENU  
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to  
the ESCAPE side.  
To enter text  
Some items, such as time data or file names, must  
be set by entering text. When you select one of  
these items, the text entry area is highlighted, with  
“SET” displayed to the right.  
Basic Setup Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
1
Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or  
j button, to select a character, and then  
confirm by pressing the MENU knob or  
the SET button.  
The cursor moves to the next position.  
To return to the previous position, push the  
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch  
down to the ESCAPE side.  
2
3
Select characters for all positions up to  
the last.  
The cursor moves to “SET”.  
Press the MENU knob or the SET  
button.  
This confirms the setting.  
To cancel the setting change  
Push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE  
switch down to the ESCAPE side.  
To reset a setting to the initial value  
1
Before a setting is changed or after a  
setting change is cancelled, push the  
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE  
switch up to the CANCEL/PRST side.  
2
When the message to confirm whether  
the current setting is reset to the initial  
value, push the MENU CANCEL/  
PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the  
CANCEL/PRST side again.  
The current setting is reset to the initial value.  
To exit the menu  
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or press  
the MENU button.  
The normal camera picture reappears.  
Basic Setup Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
   
Menu List  
Settings in bold are the factory default values.  
OPERATION Menu  
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Format  
Specifies the  
camcorder’s operating  
mode and recording  
format.  
HD/SD  
HD/SD  
Switches between HD or SD as the  
operating mode (execute by  
selecting Execute).  
HD System Line  
1080/720  
When the operating mode is HD,  
sets the number of system lines to  
1080 or 720 (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
System Frequency  
The available settings  
vary depending on the  
settings in HD/SD, HD  
System Line, and  
Country.  
Selects the system frequency  
(execute by selecting Execute).  
59.94i/29.97P/23.98P  
When the HD/SD setting is [HD],  
the HD System Line setting is  
[1080], and the Country setting is  
other than [PAL Area].  
59.94P/29.97P/23.98P  
When the HD/SD setting is [HD],  
the HD System Line setting is [720],  
and the Country setting is other than  
[PAL Area].  
59.94i/29.97P  
When the HD/SD setting is [SD],  
and the Country setting is other than  
[PAL Area].  
• When the HD/SD setting is [HD], the  
HD System Line setting is [1080],  
and the Country setting is [PAL  
Area].  
50i/25P  
• When the HD/SD setting is [SD], and  
the Country setting is [PAL Area].  
50P/25P  
When the HD/SD setting is [HD],  
the HD System Line setting is [720],  
and the Country setting is [PAL  
Area].  
Menu List  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Format  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Rec Format  
The available settings  
vary depending on the  
settings in HD/SD, HD  
System Line, and System  
Frequency.  
Selects the recording format  
(execute by selecting Execute).  
Specifies the  
camcorder’s operating  
mode and recording  
format.  
HQ 1920/HQ 1440  
When the HD/SD setting is [HD],  
the HD System Line setting is  
[1080], and the System Frequency  
setting is [29.97P] or [25P].  
When the HD/SD setting is [HD],  
the HD System Line setting is  
[1080], and the System Frequency  
setting is other than [29.97P] and  
[25P].  
HQ 1920/HQ 1440/  
SP 1440  
HQ 1280  
When the HD/SD setting is [HD],  
and the HD System Line setting is  
[720].  
DVCAM  
When the HD/SD setting is [SD].  
Selects the aspect ratio when SD  
mode (recording format: DVCAM)  
is selected (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
Aspect Ratio (SD)  
16:9/4:3  
Country  
NTSC Area/NTSC(J)  
Area/PAL Area  
Selects the area of use (execute by  
selecting Execute).  
Format Media  
Executes a media  
format.  
Media(A)  
Execute/Cancel  
Initializes the S×S memory card in  
slot A (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
Media(B)  
Execute/Cancel  
Initializes the S×S memory card in  
slot B (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
Menu List  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Input/Output  
Makes settings related  
to I/O signals.  
Output& i.LINK  
HD&HDV/SD&HDV/  
SD&DV/480P (576P)  
Selects the signals output from the  
video connectors and the i.LINK  
(HDV/DV) connector.  
• When the HD/SD setting is SD,  
“SD&DV” is selected.  
• On 480P576P, 480P” can be  
selected when the Country setting is  
other than “PAL Area”, and “576P”  
can be selected when the Country  
setting is “PAL Area”.  
23.98P Output  
Source Select  
i.LINK I/O  
PsF/Pull Down  
Camera/i.LINK  
Enable/Disable  
When the video format is HQ 1920/  
23.98P or HQ 1440/23.98P, selects  
whether to use progressive output  
(PsF) or pulldown output (Pull  
Down).  
Selects whether to use the video  
camera picture (Camera) or the  
signal input from the i.LINK (HDV/  
DV) connector (i.LINK) as the video  
input source.  
Selects whether to enable or disable  
input and output of signals via the  
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.  
When Enable is selected, you can  
execute auto black balance  
adjustment during i.LINK output.  
Turns on or off the output of signals  
from the HD/SD SDI OUT  
SDI Output  
On/Off  
connector.  
HDMI Output  
On/Off  
Turns on or off the output of signals  
from the HDMI connector.  
SDI/HDMI Out  
Super  
On/Off  
Turns on or off the superimposition  
of text information on the output of  
the HD/SD SDI OUT and HDMI  
connectors.  
Video Out Super  
On/Off  
Turns on or off the superimposition  
of text information on the output of  
the VIDEO OUT connector.  
Menu List  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Input/Output  
Makes settings related  
to I/O signals.  
Down Converter  
Crop/Letter/Squeeze  
Selects the signal conversion mode  
for output of SD signals.  
Crop: Crop the edges of the 16:9  
picture and output as a 4:3  
picture.  
Letter: Mask the top and bottom of  
the 4:3 picture and display in  
the center of the screen as a  
16:9 picture.  
Squeeze: Squeeze the 16:9 picture  
horizontally and output as a 4:3  
picture.  
Wide ID  
Through/AUTO  
Selects whether to add wide picture  
information to the SD output signal.  
Through: Output without adding  
wide picture information.  
AUTO: Add and output wide  
picture information when the  
Down Converter setting is  
Squeeze.  
Super Impose  
Super(VF Display) On/Off  
When the setting of Input/Output  
>SDI/HDMI Out Super or Video  
Out Super is On, superimpose text  
information on the output from the  
HD/SD SDI OUT connector, HDMI  
connector, and VIDEO OUT  
connector, as specified (On or Off)  
for each item.  
Makes settings related  
to superimposed text  
and markers.  
Super(Menu)  
On/Off  
Super(Timecode)  
On/Off  
Super(Marker)  
On/Off  
When the setting of Input/Output  
>Video Out Super is On, specifies  
whether to superimpose markers on  
the output from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
Menu List  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Rec Function  
Slow & Quick  
On/Off  
Turns the Slow & Quick Motion  
function on or off. (When this is set  
to On, the Picture Cache Rec,  
Interval Rec, and Frame Rec sub-  
items are set to Off.)  
Makes settings related  
to special recording  
modes.  
Frame Rate  
The available settings  
vary depending on the  
When the Slow & Quick setting is  
On, sets the frame rate for Slow &  
Format >HD System Line Quick Motion shooting.  
setting.  
When Format >Country When the HD System Line setting is  
is set to other than [PAL 1080.  
Area]: 1 to 30  
When Format >Country  
is set to [PAL Area]: 1 to  
25 to 30  
When Format >Country When the HD System Line setting is  
is set to other than [PAL 720.  
Area]: 1 to 30 to 60  
When Format >Country  
is set to [PAL Area]: 1 to  
25 to 60  
Picture Cache Rec  
On/Off  
Turns the picture cache function on  
or off. (When this is set to On, the  
Slow & Quick, Interval Rec, Frame  
Rec sub-items are set to Off.)  
P. Cache Rec Time  
Interval Rec  
0-2sec/2-4sec/4-6sec/  
6-8sec/8-10sec/10-12sec/ is On, set the picture cache time.  
12-14sec/13-15sec  
When the Picture Cache Rec setting  
On/Off  
Turns the Interval Rec function on or  
off. (When this is set to On, the Slow  
& Quick, Picture Cache Rec, and  
Frame Rec sub-items are set to Off.)  
Turns the Frame Rec function on or  
off. (When this is set to On, the Slow  
& Quick, Picture Cache Rec, and  
Interval Rec sub-items are set to  
Off.)  
Frame Rec  
On/Off  
Number of Frames  
The available settings  
vary depending on the  
settings in Format >HD  
When Interval Rec or Frame Rec is  
set to On, specifies the number of  
frames to shoot in one Interval Rec  
System Line and Format or Frame Rec take.  
>System Frequency.  
2frame/6frame/12frame When the HD System Line setting is  
720, and the System Frequency  
setting is 59.94P or 50P.  
1frame/3frame/6frame/ When the HD System Line setting is  
9frame  
other than 720, or the System  
Frequency setting is other than  
59.94P or 50P.  
Menu List  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/ When the Interval Rec setting is On,  
20/30/40/50 (sec) sets the interval for Interval Rec  
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/ shooting.  
20/30/40/50 (min) 1/2/3/  
4/6/12/24 (hour)  
Description  
Rec Function  
Interval Time  
Makes settings related  
to special recording  
modes.  
Pre-Lighting  
Off/2sec/5sec/10sec  
If you want the video light to be  
turned on before Interval Rec  
shooting, select a number of seconds  
before the start of shooting. If you  
do not want it to be turned on, select  
Off.  
Assignable SW  
Assigns functions to  
assignable switches.  
<0>  
See page 129.  
Assigns function to ASSIGN. 0  
switch.  
<1>  
Assigns function to ASSIGN. 1  
switch.  
for more information  
about assigning  
<2>  
Assigns function to ASSIGN. 2  
switch.  
<3>  
Assigns function to ASSIGN. 3  
switch.  
functions.  
<4>  
Assigns function to ASSIGNABLE  
4 switch.  
<5>  
Assigns function to ASSIGNABLE  
5 switch.  
RET  
Assigns function to RET button on  
the lens.  
C. Temp  
Zoom Speed  
Assigns function to COLOR TEMP.  
button.  
0 to 20 to 99  
When Zoom has been assigned to  
the ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch,  
specifies the zoom speed.  
Menu List  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
Menu items  
VF Setting  
Makes settings related  
to the viewfinder  
screen.  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Color  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Adjusts the density of the colors  
displayed in the viewfinder screen.  
Selects Color or B&W as the display  
mode of the viewfinder screen.  
(Even when B&W is selected, some  
indications are always displayed in  
color. Examples include tally  
indications, thumbnails, and the skin  
gate area.)  
Mode  
Color/B&W  
Peaking Type  
Normal/Color/Both  
Selects the peaking type.  
Normal: Normal peaking  
Color: Color peaking  
Both: Both  
Peaking Frequency Normal/High  
Selects Normal or High as the  
peaking frequency.  
Peaking Color  
White/Red/Yellow/Blue When the Peaking Type setting is  
Color, selects the peaking color from  
among White, Red, Yellow, and  
Blue.  
Peaking Level  
DXF Rec Tally  
Low/Mid/High  
When the Peaking Type setting is  
Both, selects the color peaking level  
from among Low, Mid, and High.  
When a separately sold viewfinder is  
installed, specified whether to light  
the tally indicator on the upper side  
only (Upper), or on both the upper  
and lower sides (Both).  
Upper/Both  
Menu List  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Marker  
Makes settings related  
to marker display in the  
viewfinder screen.  
Sub-item  
Setting  
Settings  
On/Off  
Description  
Turns all markers on or off.  
When the center marker is  
displayed, selects the type. Select  
Off if you do not want to display the  
marker.  
Center Marker  
1/2/3/4/Off  
Center H Position  
Center V Position  
Safety Zone  
–40 to 0 to 40  
–40 to 0 to 40  
On/Off  
Specifies the horizontal position of  
the center marker.  
Specifies the vertical position of the  
center marker.  
Turns the safety zone display on or  
off.  
Safety Area  
80%/90%/92.5%/95%  
Selects the safety zone range.  
When an aspect marker is to be  
displayed, selects the display  
method. Select Off if you do not  
want to display the marker.  
Line: Show as white lines.  
Mask: Display by lowering the  
video signal level of areas  
outside the marker range.  
Selects the aspect ratio of the  
marker.  
Aspect Marker  
Line/Mask/Off  
Aspect Select  
Aspect Mask  
15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/  
1.66:1/1.85:1/2.35:1/  
2.4:1  
0% to 30% to 90% (10% When the Aspect Marker setting is  
step)  
Mask, specifies the video signal  
level of areas outside the marker  
range as a percentage value relative  
to the video signal level of areas  
inside the marker range.  
User Box  
On/Off  
Turns the box cursor display on or  
off.  
User Box Width  
40 to 500 to 999  
Specifies the box cursor width  
(distance from the center to the left  
and right edges).  
User Box Height  
70 to 500 to 999  
Specifies the box cursor height  
(distance from the center to the top  
and bottom edges).  
User Box H Position –479 to 0 to 479  
Specifies the horizontal position of  
the box cursor center.  
User Box V Position –464 to 0 to 464  
Specifies the vertical position of the  
box cursor center.  
Guide Frame  
On/Off  
Turns display of the guide frame on  
or off.  
Menu List  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Gain Switch  
Makes settings related  
to the GAIN switch.  
Sub-item  
Settings  
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ Specifies the gain value for the  
12dB/18dB L position of the GAIN switch.  
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ Specifies the gain value for the  
12dB/18dB M position of the GAIN switch.  
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ Specifies the gain value for the  
12dB/18dB H position of the GAIN switch.  
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ Specifies the gain value for the  
Description  
Gain Low  
Gain Mid  
Gain High  
Gain Turbo  
12dB/18dB/24dB  
Turbo Gain function, which can be  
assigned to an assignable switch.  
Turns shockless gain (a function that  
switches smoothly when the gain is  
switched) on or off.  
Shockless Gain  
Mode  
On/Off  
TLCS  
Makes settings related  
to total level control.  
Backlight/Standard/  
Spotlight  
Selects the auto iris mode used when  
the TLCS system is activated.  
Backlight: Backlight mode (lessens  
the blackout of the main subject  
that occurs under backlit  
conditions)  
Standard: Standard mode  
Spotlight: Spotlight mode (lessens  
the whiteout of the main subject  
that occurs under a spotlight)  
Specifies the control speed (speed of  
reaction to changes in the video)  
used when the TLCS system is  
activated. (Larger values specify  
quicker reaction times.)  
Speed  
–99 to 0 to +99  
AGC  
On/Off  
Turns the AGC (auto gain control)  
function on or off.  
AGC Limit  
AGC Point  
3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/  
18dB  
Specifies the maximum gain used  
when AGC is on.  
F5.6/F4/F2.8  
Specifies the F value where control  
by auto iris switches to control by  
AGC, used when AGC is on.  
Turns the auto shutter function on or  
off.  
Auto Shutter  
On/Off  
Auto Shutter Limit 1/100 / 1/150 / 1/200 /  
Selects the maximum shutter speed  
used when auto shutter is on.  
Specifies the F value where control  
by auto iris switches to control by  
auto shutter, used when auto shutter  
is on.  
1/250  
Auto Shutter Point  
F5.6/F8/F11/F16  
Zebra  
Makes settings related  
to zebra displays.  
Zebra Select  
1/2/BOTH  
Selects the zebra pattern type  
(Zebra1, Zebra2, Both).  
Zebra1 Level  
Zebra1 Aperture  
Level  
50% to 70% to 107%  
Specifies the Zebra1 display level.  
Specifies the Zebra1 aperture level.  
1 to 10% to 20%  
Zebra2 Level  
52% to 100% to 109%  
Specifies the Zebra2 display level.  
Menu List  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Video Level  
Warnings  
Settings  
Description  
Display On/Off  
Selects the items to  
display in the  
On/Off  
Turns the warnings that appear when  
the video level is too bright or too  
dark on or off.  
viewfinder screen.  
Brightness Display On/Off  
Turns the numerical indication of the  
video brightness on or off.  
Turns the histogram display of video  
signal levels on or off (in HD mode  
only).  
Histogram Display On/Off  
Lens Info  
Off/Meter/Feet  
Selects meters or feet as the unit for  
display of the depth of field. Select  
Off if you do not want to display the  
depth of field.  
Focus Position  
Zoom Position  
On/Off  
Turns the indication of the lens focus  
position on or off.  
On/Off  
Turns the indication of the lens  
zoom position on or off.  
Audio Level Meter On/Off  
Turns the display of the audio level  
meters on or off.  
Timecode  
On/Off  
Turns the display of time data  
(timecode, user bits, counter,  
duration) on or off.  
Battery Remain  
On/Off  
Turns the indications of the  
remaining battery time and input  
voltage on or off.  
Media Remain  
TLCS Mode  
Focus Mode  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
Turns the indication of the  
remaining media capacity on or off.  
Turns the indication of the TLCS  
operating mode on or off.  
Turns the indication of the focus  
operating mode on or off.  
Turns the indication of the white  
balance mode on or off.  
White Balance Mode On/Off  
Filter Position  
Iris Position  
Gain Setting  
Shutter Setting  
Color Temp  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
Turns the indication of the ND filter  
setting on or off.  
Turns the indication of the iris  
position on or off.  
Turns the indication of the gain  
setting on or off.  
Turns the indications of the shutter  
mode and shutter speed on or off.  
Turns the indication of the color  
temperature on or off.  
Video Format  
Turns the indication of the video  
format on or off.  
Menu List  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Display On/Off  
Selects the items to  
display in the  
System Line  
On/Off  
Turns the indication of the system  
lines on or off.  
Rec Mode  
On/Off  
Turns the indication of special  
recording modes (S&Q, Interval,  
Frame Rec, Picture Cache Rec) on  
or off.  
viewfinder screen.  
Extender  
On/Off  
Turns the lens extender indication on  
or off.  
WRR RF Level  
On/Off  
Turns the indication of the digital  
wireless receiver reception level on  
or off.  
Clip Number(PB)  
Iris Override  
On/Off  
Turns the indication of clip  
information on or off.  
Auto Iris  
Makes settings related  
to auto iris.  
On/Off  
Turns iris override (a setting that  
opens or closes the iris more than  
normal) on or off.  
Iris Speed  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the iris control speed  
(speed of reaction to changes in the  
video). (Larger values specify  
quicker reaction times.)  
Clip High light  
Iris Window  
On/Off  
Turns on or off the function that  
disregards highlights and forces a  
flatter reaction to high luminance.  
Selects the auto iris detection  
window type.  
1/2/3/4/5/6/Var  
On/Off  
Var: Variable  
Iris Window  
Indication  
Turns the indication of the auto iris  
detection window frame on or off.  
Menu List  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
White Setting  
White Switch<B>  
Memory/ATW  
Specifies the operating mode  
selected by the B position of the  
WHITE BAL switch.  
Makes settings related  
to auto white balance  
adjustments.  
Memory: Auto white balance  
ATW: Auto tracing white balance  
Specifies the reaction speed when  
the WHITE BAL switch setting is  
changed. Off is an instant reaction,  
and 1 is faster than 2 or 3.  
Specifies the reaction speed when  
the White Switch<B> setting is  
ATW. 1 is the fastest reaction.  
Specifies whether auto white  
balance is executed at the center of  
the screen.  
Shockless White  
Off/1/2/3  
ATW Speed  
1/2/3/4/5  
AWB Fixed Area  
On/Off  
On: Execute in an area  
corresponding to 25% of the  
height and width of the screen.  
Off: Execute in an area  
corresponding to 70% of the  
height and width of the screen.  
Specifies whether to allocate a white  
balance memory area for each  
FILTER knob position.  
Filter White Memory On/Off  
On: Allocation a white balance  
memory area for each FILTER  
knob position.  
Off: Use A/B memory regardless of  
the filter position.  
Menu List  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Offset White  
Makes settings related  
to white balance offset  
values.  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Offset White <A>  
On/Off  
Specifies whether to add (On) or not  
to add (Off) an offset value to the  
white balance value in memory A.  
When the setting of Offset  
White<A> is On, specifies (as a  
color temperature) the offset to add  
to the white balance value in  
memory A. (Note that the error  
range becomes larger for higher  
offset color temperatures. Adjust  
while viewing the actual video.)  
Specifies a more precise color  
temperature, for use when  
Warm Cool <A>  
Approximate color  
temperature  
Warm Cool  
Balance<A>  
–99 to 0 to +99  
satisfactory video cannot be  
obtained with the Warm Cool <A>  
setting.  
Offset White <B>  
Warm Cool <B>  
On/Off  
When this is set to On, the offset  
adjusted set with this item is added  
to the white balance of channel B.  
When the setting of Offset  
White<B> is On, specifies (as a  
color temperature) the offset to add  
to the white balance value in  
memory B. (Note that the error  
range becomes larger for higher  
offset color temperatures. Adjust  
while viewing the actual video.)  
Specifies a more precise color  
temperature, for use when  
Approximate color  
temperature  
Warm Cool  
Balance<B>  
–99 to 0 to +99  
satisfactory video cannot be  
obtained with the Warm Cool <B>  
setting.  
Shutter Select  
Shutter Select  
Zone  
Second/Degree  
Specifies the unit used to select  
shutter speeds.  
Makes settings related  
to shutter speed  
selection.  
Second: Select in units of seconds.  
Degree: Select in units of degrees.  
Specifies a difference from UTC  
(Greenwich Mean Time) in units of  
30 minutes.  
Time Zone  
Specifies the time zone.  
–12:00 to +0:00 to  
+14:00 (in steps of  
30 minutes)  
Menu List  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Clip  
Make settings for clip  
name or clip  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Title Prefix  
Text input  
Specifies the title part (4 to 46  
alphanumeric characters) of clip  
titles.  
When the currently specified title is  
eight characters or fewer in length,  
the entire title appears. When the  
title is longer than eight characters,  
the first seven characters appear and  
a “···” symbol appears in place of the  
eighth character.  
management.  
Note  
Do not assign clip  
names that begin with  
the “.” (period) symbol.  
Clips with names in  
which the first  
character is “.” cannot  
be viewed on the  
Displays the Character Set screen.  
Windows or Macintosh  
application software.  
Character Set screen configuration  
• Character selection area (three  
lines)  
Select the character to insert at the  
title prefix cursor position.  
!#$%()+.-.;=@[]^_~0123456789  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV  
WXYZ  
• Cursor operation area (one line)  
Space: Changes the character at the  
cursor position to a space  
INS: Inserts a space at the cursor  
position  
DEL: Deletes the character at the  
cursor position  
T: Moves the cursor to the left  
t: Moves the cursor to the right  
ESC: Cancels the change and return  
to the normal menu  
END: Executes the change and  
return to the normal menu  
• Title prefix area (one line)  
An area to enter the title  
To set titles  
1 Turn the MENU knob or press the  
arrow buttons to select a  
character, highlighting it, in the  
character selection area, and then  
press the MENU knob or the SET  
button to insert it at the cursor  
position in the title prefix area.  
(The cursor moves to the right.)  
2 Repeat step 1 to add more  
characters to the title (using  
Space, INS, and DEL as  
required).  
3 When you have finished entering  
the title, select END to close the  
Character Set screen.  
Menu List  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OPERATION  
Menu items  
Clip  
Make settings for clip  
name or clip  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Number Set  
0001 to 9999  
Specifies the initial value of the  
numeric part (four digits) of clip  
names.  
management.  
Update  
Media<A>/Media<B>  
Updates the management files on the  
media in the selected slot (execute  
by selecting Execute).  
PAINT Menu  
PAINT  
Menu items  
Switch Status  
Turns various signal  
correction functions  
and a test signal on or  
off.  
Sub-item  
Gamma  
Settings  
On/Off  
On/Off  
Description  
Turns gamma correction on or off.  
Turns black gamma correction on or  
off.  
Black Gamma  
Matrix  
On/Off  
Turns linear matrix correction and  
user matrix correction on or off.  
Turns knee correction on or off.  
Turns white clip correction on or  
off.  
Knee  
On/Off  
White Clip  
On/Off  
Detail  
On/Off  
Turns detail correction on or off.  
Turns aperture correction on or off.  
Turns flare correction on or off.  
Turns the test saw signal on or off.  
Displays the white balance color  
temperature saved in memory A.  
Aperture  
Flare  
On/Off  
On/Off  
Test Saw  
Color Temp <A>  
On/Off  
White  
Sets the color  
1500K to 3200K to  
50000K (reference  
values)  
temperature, and  
performs manual white  
balance adjustment.  
Color Temp BAL  
<A>  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the white balance gain  
values saved in memory A (linked R  
gain and B gain).  
R Gain <A>  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the white balance R gain  
value saved in memory A.  
B Gain <A>  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the white balance B gain  
value saved in memory A.  
Color Temp <B>  
1500K to 3200K to  
50000K (reference  
values)  
Displays the white balance color  
temperature saved in memory B.  
Color Temp BAL  
<B>  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the white balance gain  
values saved in memory B (linked R  
gain and B gain).  
R Gain <B>  
B Gain <B>  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the white balance R gain  
value saved in memory B.  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the white balance B gain  
value saved in memory B.  
Menu List  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PAINT  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Master Black  
R Black  
Settings  
Description  
Black  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the master black level.  
Specifies the R black level.  
Specifies the B black level.  
Specifies the black  
level (level of the  
unilluminated parts of  
the video).  
B Black  
You can achieve a  
desired look by  
adjusting the black  
level for deeper or  
shallower blacks.  
Flare  
Makes settings related  
to flare.  
Flare is light generated  
from a bright image  
region that spreads  
broadly across the  
image, adding light to  
dark regions and  
Flare  
On/Off  
Turns flare correction on or off.  
Sets the master flare correction  
level.  
Master Flare  
–99 to 0 to +99  
R Flare  
G Flare  
B Flare  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Sets the R flare correction level.  
Sets the G flare correction level.  
Sets the B flare correction level.  
reducing contrast. It is  
caused by reflection  
inside the lens system.  
Gamma  
Gamma  
On/Off  
Turns gamma correction on or off.  
Makes settings related  
to gamma.  
Gamma correction  
allows you to  
significantly alter the  
impression made by the  
video by adjusting the  
contrast.  
Step Gamma  
0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90 (0.05 Specifies a gamma correction value  
step)  
in steps of 0.05  
Master Gamma  
R Gamma  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
The available settings  
vary depending on the  
setting in Gamma  
Category (see  
Specifies the master gamma level.  
Specifies the R gamma level.  
Specifies the G gamma level.  
Specifies the B gamma level.  
Select the gamma table to use in  
gamma correction.  
When Gamma Category is STD:  
1 DVW: DVW camcorder  
equivalent  
G Gamma  
B Gamma  
Gamma Select  
“Description”).  
2 ×4.5: ×4.5 gain  
3 ×3.5: ×3.5 gain  
4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent  
5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent  
(default setting)  
6 ×5.0: ×5.0 gain  
When Gamma Category is HG:  
1 3250: Condense 325% video input  
to 100% video output  
2 4600: Condense 460% video input  
to 100% video output  
3 3259: Condense 325% video input  
to 109% video output  
4 4609: Condense 460% video input  
to 109% video output (default  
setting)  
Gamma Category  
STD/HG  
Selects use of standard gamma  
(STD) or HyperGamma (HG).  
Menu List  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAINT  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Black Gamma  
Black Gamma  
On/Off  
Turns black gamma correction on or  
Makes settings related  
to black gamma  
correction.  
off.  
Gamma Level  
Range  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the master black gamma  
level.  
Black gamma  
Low/L.Mid/H.Mid/High Selects the black gamma correction  
correction allows you  
to reproduce gradations  
and color nuances in  
black or near-black  
(dark) parts of the  
picture.  
effective range.  
LOW: 0 to 3.6%  
L.MID: 0 to 7.2%  
H.MID: 0 to 14.4%  
HIGH: 0 to 28.8%  
Knee  
Makes settings related  
to knee correction.  
Knee correction is  
processing that  
prevents washout by  
compressing the bright  
parts of the video  
according to an upper  
limit for the dynamic  
range of the recorded  
and output picture. The  
signal level where knee  
processing begins is  
called the “knee point”,  
and the slope of knee  
compression is called  
the “knee slope”.  
Knee  
On/Off  
Turns knee correction on or off.  
Specifies the knee point.  
Knee Point  
50.0% to 90.0% to  
109.0%  
Knee Slope  
–99 to 0 to +99  
On/Off  
Specifies the knee slope.  
Turns the knee saturation function  
on or off.  
Knee Saturation  
Knee Saturation  
Level  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the knee saturation level.  
White Clip  
White Clip  
Level  
On/Off  
Turns white clipping adjustment on  
or off.  
Makes settings related  
to white clipping  
adjustments.  
90.0% to 109.0%  
Specifies the white clip level.  
White clipping is  
processing that limits  
the maximum level of  
video output signals.  
The maximum video  
signal output value is  
called the “white clip  
level”.  
Menu List  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAINT  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Detail  
Settings  
Description  
Detail(HD Mode)/  
Detail(SD Mode)  
Makes settings related  
to details adjustments  
in HD mode and SD  
mode.  
Detail adjustment is  
processing that  
improves the clarity of  
the video by adding  
detail signals to the  
edges of the subject.  
On/Off  
Turns detail adjustment on or off.  
Specifies the detail level.  
Specifies the mix ratio between the  
H detail level and the V detail level.  
Specifies the crispening level.  
Turns the level depend adjustment  
function on or off.  
Level  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
H/V Ratio  
Crispening  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Level Depend  
On/Off  
Level Depend Level –99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the level depend level.  
Specifies the central frequency for H  
detail signals. Larger values give  
finer details.  
Frequency  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Knee Aperture  
On/Off  
Turns the knee aperture function on  
or off.  
Knee Aperture Level –99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the knee aperture level.  
Specifies the detail limiter values for  
both the white-side and black-side  
direction.  
Limit  
–99 to 0 to +99  
White Limit  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
NAM/G/R+G/Y  
Specifies the white-side detail  
limiter value.  
Black Limit  
Specifies the black-side detail  
limiter value.  
V-BLK Limit  
V Detail Creation  
Specifies the black-side V detail  
limiter value.  
Selects the source signal used to  
generate the V detail signal.  
NAM: A V detail signal created  
from the R signal, or a V detail  
signal created from the G  
signal, or a V detail signal  
created from the B signal,  
whichever is the signal with the  
highest level  
G: G signal  
G+R: Composite signal comprising  
the G signal and R signal in a  
1:1 ratio  
Y: Y signal  
Aperture  
Aperture  
Level  
On/Off  
Turns aperture correction on or off.  
Sets the aperture level.  
Makes settings related  
to aperture correction.  
Aperture correction is  
processing to improve  
resolution by adding  
high-frequency  
–99 to 0 to +99  
aperture signals to the  
video signal, which  
corrects degeneration  
due to high-frequency  
characteristics.  
Menu List  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAINT  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Skin Detail  
Makes settings related  
to skin detail  
correction.  
Skin detail correction is  
processing that  
increases or decreases  
the detail level of a  
specified color range  
(skin tone range), for  
the purpose of  
obtaining attractive  
reproduction of skin  
tones.  
Skin Detail  
On/Off  
Turns skin detail correction on or  
off.  
Area Detection  
Area Indication  
Color detection screen  
Detects the color to be targeted by  
skin detail correction.  
Turns on or off the function that  
displays a zebra pattern in the area  
targeted by skin detail correction.  
Specifies the skin detail level.  
Specifies the saturation of the color  
targeted by skin detail correction.  
Specifies the hue of the color  
targeted by skin detail correction.  
Specifies a range for the hue of the  
color targeted by skin detail  
correction.  
On/Off  
Level  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Saturation  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Hue  
0 to 359  
Width  
0 to 40 to 90  
Matrix  
Matrix  
On/Off  
Turns the matrix correction function  
on or off.  
Makes settings related  
to matrix correction.  
Matrix correction  
Preset Matrix  
Preset Select  
On/Off  
Turns the preset matrix function on  
or off.  
allows you to adjust the  
color and vividness of  
the video. Depending  
on the effect you want,  
you can select one from  
among a number of  
preset matrixes, which  
define different  
1/2/3/4/5/6  
Selects a preset matrix.  
1: SMPTE-240M equivalent  
2: ITU-709 equivalent  
3: SMPTE WIDE equivalent  
4: SD equivalent  
5: EBU equivalent  
6: Standard  
parameter sets. Or you  
can select a user matrix  
with your own  
User Matrix  
On/Off  
Turns the user matrix function on or  
off.  
parameters.  
User Matrix R-G  
User Matrix R-B  
User Matrix G-R  
User Matrix G-B  
User Matrix B-R  
User Matrix B-G  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies a freely defined R-G user  
matrix.  
Specifies a freely defined R-B user  
matrix.  
Specifies a freely defined G-R user  
matrix.  
Specifies a freely defined G-B user  
matrix.  
Specifies a freely defined B-R user  
matrix.  
Specifies a freely defined B-G user  
matrix.  
Menu List  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAINT  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Multi Matrix  
Makes settings related  
to multi matrix  
Multi Matrix  
On/Off  
Turns the multi matrix correction  
function on or off.  
Area Indication  
On/Off  
Turns on or off the function that  
displays a zebra pattern in the color  
area targeted by multi matrix  
correction.  
correction.  
Multi-matrix correction  
allows specific colors  
to be selected for  
saturation correction in  
a 16-axis hue space.  
Color Detection  
Axis  
Color detection screen  
Detects colors targeted by multi  
matrix correction.  
B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/  
Specifies a color targeted by multi  
R/R+/YL–/YL/YL+/G–/ matrix correction (16-axis mode)  
G/G+/CY/CY+/B–  
Hue  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the hue of the color  
targeted by multi matrix correction  
for each 16-axis mode.  
Saturation  
V Modulation  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the saturation of the color  
targeted by multi matrix correction  
for each 16-axis mode.  
V Modulation  
On/Off  
Turns V modulation shading on or  
off.  
Makes settings related  
to V modulation  
shading.  
V modulation shading  
corrects vertical  
imbalances in  
sensitivity arising from  
the relationship  
between a lens and  
prism.  
Master V  
Modulation  
R V Modulation  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the master V modulation  
level.  
Specifies the V modulation level of  
R signals.  
G V Modulation  
B V Modulation  
Specifies the V modulation level of  
G signals.  
Specifies the V modulation level of  
B signals.  
Low Key Saturation Low Key Saturation On/Off  
Turns low key saturation correction  
on or off.  
Makes settings related  
to low key saturation  
correction.  
Level  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies the saturation of colors in  
low luminance areas.  
You can correct the  
saturation of colors in  
dark parts of the video  
only.  
Range  
Low/L.Mid/H.Mid/High Specifies the luminance level for  
which low key saturation is enabled.  
Menu List  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE Menu  
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
White Shading  
Channel Select  
Red/Green/Blue  
Selects the target of white shading  
correction.  
Makes settings related  
to white shading.  
White shading is  
required for each  
different lens to correct  
irregularities arising  
from lens  
characteristics. It  
corrects luminance and  
color irregularities in  
bright areas.  
R/G/B White H Saw –99 to 0 to +99  
R/G/B White H Para –99 to 0 to +99  
R/G/B White V Saw –99 to 0 to +99  
R/G/B White V Para –99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies a SAW white shading  
correction value for the horizontal  
direction.  
Specifies a parabola white shading  
correction value for the horizontal  
direction.  
Specifies a SAW white shading  
correction value for the vertical  
direction.  
Specifies a parabola white shading  
correction value for the vertical  
direction.  
White Saw/Para  
Info Before End  
On/Off  
Turns the white shading SAW and  
parabola correction functions on or  
off.  
Battery  
Makes settings related  
to batteries.  
5%/10%/15%...95%/  
100%  
Specifies a threshold value that  
triggers a “Battery Near End”  
warning when a BP-GL65/GL95  
battery pack is used.  
Info End  
0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5% Specifies a threshold value that  
triggers a “Battery End” warning  
when a BP-GL65/GL95 battery  
pack is used.  
Sony Before End  
Sony End  
11.5V to 17V (0.1V step) Specifies a threshold value that  
triggers a “Battery Near End”  
warning when a BP-L60S/L80S  
battery pack is used.  
11.0V to 11.5V (0.1V  
step)  
Specifies a threshold value that  
triggers a “Battery End” warning  
when a BP-L60S/L80S battery pack  
is used.  
Other Before End  
Other End  
11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V Specifies a threshold value that  
(0.1V step)  
triggers a “Battery Near End”  
warning when a non-Sony battery  
pack is used.  
11.0V to 14.0V (0.1V  
step)  
Specifies a threshold value that  
triggers a “Battery End” warning  
when a non-Sony battery pack is  
used.  
DC In Before End  
11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V Specifies a threshold value that  
(0.1V step)  
triggers a “Battery Near End”  
warning when an external power  
source is connected to the DC IN  
connector.  
Menu List  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Battery  
Makes settings related  
to batteries.  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
DC In End  
11.0V to 14.0V (0.1V  
step)  
Specifies a threshold value that  
triggers a “Battery End” warning  
when an external power source is  
connected to the DC IN connector.  
Detected Battery  
Type Detection  
Info/Sony/Other/DC IN Displays the results of automatic  
battery pack type detection.  
Auto/Other  
Auto: Detect the battery type  
automatically.  
Other: Fix battery type detection as  
“Other”.  
Segment No.10  
Segment No.9  
Segment No.8  
Segment No.7  
Segment No.6  
Segment No.5  
Segment No.4  
Segment No.3  
Segment No.2  
Segment No.1  
11.0V to 17.0V (0.1V  
step)  
Specify voltage threshold values  
that cause remaining capacity  
segments to go off in the display of  
remaining battery capacity (see  
page 29). (The segments go off  
below the specified value.)  
These values are used when the  
battery type has been found to be  
“Other”.  
11.0V to 16.0V to 17.0V  
(0.1V step)  
11.0V to 15.0V to 17.0V  
(0.1V step)  
11.0V to 14.0V to 17.0V  
(0.1V step)  
11.0V to 13.5V to 17.0V  
(0.1V step)  
11.0V to 13.0V to 17.0V  
(0.1V step)  
11.0V to 12.5V to 17.0V  
(0.1V step)  
11.0V to 12.0V to 17.0V  
(0.1V step)  
11.0V to 11.5V to 17.0V  
(0.1V step)  
11.0V to 17.0V (0.1V  
step)  
Menu List  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Audio  
Makes settings related  
to audio.  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Front MIC Select  
Mono/Stereo  
Selects whether the front  
microphone is monaural (Mono) or  
stereo (Stereo).  
Audio CH3/4 Mode Ch1/2 / Switch  
Selects the input signals for the  
AUDIO IN CH3/CH4 connectors.  
CH1/2: The same signals as the  
AUDIO IN CH1/ CH2  
connectors.  
Switch: The signals selected with  
the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4  
switches.  
Front MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/  
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB  
Selects the reference level for  
channel 1 of the front microphone.  
Selects the reference level for  
channel 2 of the front microphone.  
Selects the reference input level  
when the setting of the AUDIO IN  
CH1 switch is MIC.  
Front MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/  
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB  
Rear MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/  
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB  
Rear MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/  
Selects the reference input level  
when the setting of the AUDIO IN  
CH2 switch is MIC.  
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB  
Line Input Ref  
+4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL Selects the reference input level  
when the AUDIO IN CH1 and  
AUDIO IN CH2 switches are set to  
LINE.  
Min Alarm Volume Off/Set  
Selects the volume when the  
ALARM knob is turned all the way  
down.  
OFF: Almost inaudible  
SET: Fairly audible  
Speaker Attenuate  
Off/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB Selects the volume from the monitor  
speaker (does not affect earphone  
volume).  
Headphone Out  
Reference Level  
Reference Out  
Mono/Stereo  
Selects whether the earphones are  
monaural (Mono) or stereo (Stereo).  
Selects the output level of the 1 kHz  
test signal.  
–20dB/–18dB/–16dB/  
–12dB/EBUL  
0dB/+4dB/–3dB/EBUL Specifies the output level with  
respect to the reference input level.  
CH1&2 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo  
For automatic adjustment of the  
input level of analog audio signals  
recorded on channels 1 and 2,  
specifies whether to make the  
adjustments separately for each  
channel (Mono) or in stereo mode  
(Stereo).  
Menu List  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Audio  
Makes settings related  
to audio.  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
CH3&4 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo  
For automatic adjustment of the  
input level of analog audio signals  
recorded on channels 3 and 4,  
specifies whether to make the  
adjustments separately for each  
channel (Mono) or in stereo mode  
(Stereo).  
AGC Spec  
–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/  
–15dB/–17dB  
Off/–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/ For manual audio level adjustments,  
Selects the AGC saturation level.  
Limiter Mode  
–15dB/–17dB  
selects the saturation level for the  
limiter applied to loud input signals.  
Select Off if you do not wish to use  
the limiter.  
Output Limiter  
On/Off  
Turns the audio output limiter on or  
off.  
CH1 Wind Filter  
CH2 Wind Filter  
CH3 Wind Filter  
CH4 Wind Filter  
Audio SG (1KHz)  
On/Off  
Turns the channel 1 wind filter on or  
off.  
On/Off  
Turns the channel 2 wind filter on or  
off.  
On/Off  
Turns the channel 3 wind filter on or  
off.  
On/Off  
Turns the channel 4 wind filter on or  
off.  
On/Off/Auto  
Selects whether to output (On) or  
not output (Off) a 1 kHz test signal  
in color bar mode.  
Auto: Output a test signal only  
when the AUDIO SELECT  
CH1 switch is set to AUTO.  
MIC CH1 Level  
Side1/Front/Front+Side1 For recording input audio from the  
front microphone on channel 1,  
selects the knob that adjusts the  
audio level.  
Side1: The LEVEL knob (left) on  
the side panel  
Front: The MIC LEVEL knob on  
the front panel  
Front+Side1: Adjust with both the  
LEVEL knob (left) and the  
MIC LEVEL knob.  
MIC CH2 Level  
Side2/Front/Front+Side2 For recording input audio from the  
front microphone on channel 2,  
selects the knob that adjusts the  
audio level.  
Side2: The LEVEL knob (right) on  
the side panel  
Front: The MIC LEVEL knob on  
the front panel  
Front+Side2: Adjust with both the  
LEVEL knob (right) and the  
MIC LEVEL knob.  
Menu List  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Audio  
Makes settings related  
to audio.  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Rear1/WRR Level  
Side1/Front/Front+Side1 Selects the knob that adjusts the  
audio levels of a wireless  
microphone and a device connected  
to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on  
the rear panel.  
Side1: The LEVEL knob (left) on  
the side panel  
Front: The MIC LEVEL knob on  
the front panel  
Front+Side1: Adjust with both the  
LEVEL knob (left) and the  
MIC LEVEL knob.  
Rear2/WRR Level  
Side2/Front/Front+Side2 Selects the knob that adjusts the  
audio levels of a wireless  
microphone and a device connected  
to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on  
the rear panel.  
Side2: The LEVEL knob (right) on  
the side panel  
Front: The MIC LEVEL knob on  
the front panel  
Front+Side2: Adjust with both the  
LEVEL knob (right) and the  
MIC LEVEL knob.  
Audio CH3 Level  
Side3/Front/Front+Side3 Selects the knob that adjusts the  
level of audio recorded on channel  
3.  
Side3: The LEVEL knob on side  
panel  
Front: The MIC LEVEL knob on  
the front panel  
Front+Side3: Adjust with both the  
LEVEL knob and the MIC  
LEVEL knob.  
Audio CH4 Level  
Side4/Front/Front+Side4 Selects the knob that adjusts the  
level of audio recorded on channel  
4.  
Side4: The LEVEL knob on side  
panel  
Front: The MIC LEVEL knob on  
the front panel  
Front+Side4: Adjust with both the  
LEVEL knob and the MIC  
LEVEL knob.  
Menu List  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
WRR Setting  
Makes settings related  
to the wireless tuner.  
WRR Valid CH Sel All/CH1  
Selects whether to enable channels 1  
and 2 of the wireless receiver (All)  
or channel 1 only (CH1).  
WRR CH Select  
TX1/TX2  
Specifies the target channel for other  
sub-items.  
TX1: Channel 1  
TX2: Channel 2  
WRR Delay Comp On/Off  
Enables (On) or disables (Off) delay  
compensation for wireless audio  
input. (When On is selected, the  
audio in all E-E output is delayed by  
about 8 ms.)  
TX  
---  
Displays the name of the transmitter  
whose signals are being received on  
the channel selected by WRR CH  
SELECT.  
TX Audio Peak  
TX Input Level  
---/Peak  
---/Mic/Line  
Displays whether the AF level of the  
transmitter whose signals are being  
received on the channel selected by  
WRR CH SELECT are over peak.  
Displays whether the input level of  
the transmitter whose signals are  
being received on the channel  
selected by WRR CH SELECT is  
set to microphone (Mic) or line  
(Line).  
TX ATT Level  
TX LCF Freq  
---  
---  
Sets the ATT level of the transmitter  
whose signals are being received on  
the channel selected by WRR CH  
SELECT. (The setting range varies  
depending on the transmitter.)  
Sets the low cut filter frequency of  
the transmitter whose signals are  
being received on the channel  
selected by WRR CH SELECT.  
(The setting range varies depending  
on the transmitter.)  
TX System Delay  
Auto/0.0ms to 8.0ms  
Specifies the amount of audio delay.  
Auto: Automatically adjusts the  
amount of delay so that the  
delay in the audio received  
from the wireless transmitter is  
zero.  
0.0ms to 8.0ms: Sets the amount of  
anticipated wireless system  
delay, for cases in which  
several wireless systems are  
being used over a devices such  
as an audio mixer.  
Menu List  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Timecode  
Makes settings related  
to timecode.  
TC Out  
Auto/Generator  
Selects the source for timecode  
output.  
Auto: During recording, output  
values generated by the  
timecode generator, and during  
playback output values  
obtained by the timecode  
reader.  
Generator: Output values  
generated by the timecode  
generator during both recording  
and playback.  
DF/NDF  
DF/NDF  
When the Country setting is other  
than PAL Area, selects drop-frame  
mode (DF) or non-drop-frame mode  
(NDF).  
LTC UBIT  
Fix/Time  
Specifies the data recorded in LTC  
user bits.  
Fix: Record user-specified data.  
Time: Record the current time.  
Select the method used to reset the  
counter value displayed on the  
viewfinder screen.  
Counter Display  
Counter/Duration  
Counter: Continue to increment  
until the RESET button is  
pressed.  
Duration: Reset each time that  
recording is started.  
Essence Mark  
Ret Shot Mark 1  
Ret Shot Mark 2  
On/Off  
Specify whether to input Shot  
Mark1 marks using the RET button  
on the lens.  
Makes settings related  
to shot marks and clip  
index picture  
On/Off  
Specify whether to input Shot  
Mark2 marks using the RET button  
on the lens.  
thumbnails.  
Menu List  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Camera Config  
Rec Tally Blink  
On/Off  
Turns warning flashes by the  
TALLY indicator on or off. The  
warnings alert you an almost  
exhausted battery pack or low  
remaining media capacity.  
Selects the recording review time.  
Clip: Review all of the most  
recently recorded clip.  
Makes settings related  
to various camcorder  
operations.  
Rec Review  
3sec/10sec/Clip  
HD SDI Remote I/F Off/Chara/G-Tally/  
Selects whether to use the function  
that enables recording control from  
this camcorder of an external device  
connected to the HD/SD SDI OUT  
connector (HDSDI output). When  
the function is used, also selects the  
indication that shows whether the  
external device is recording.  
Off: Do not use the remote  
recording control function.  
Chara: Indicate by the remote  
device indication in the  
R-Tally  
viewfinder screen.  
G-Tally: Indicate by the TALLY  
indicator in the viewfinder  
(green tally).  
R-Tally: Indicate by the REC  
indication (recording/Rec tally)  
on the viewfinder screen.  
Color Bars Select  
RM Common  
Memory  
ARIB/100%/75%  
Selects the color bar type.  
Selects whether to share (On) or not  
share (Off) settings between times  
when a remote control unit is  
connected and times when the  
camcorder is used locally.  
For times when a remote control  
unit is connected, selects whether  
recording start/stop buttons are  
enabled on the camcorder or the  
remote control unit.  
On/Off  
RM Rec Start  
RM/CAM/PARA  
RM: Remote control unit  
CAM: Camcorder  
PARA: Both  
Image Invert  
On/Off  
Turns the function that inverts  
images vertically on or off.  
Menu List  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Preset White  
Color Temp<P>  
1500K to 3200K to  
50000K (reference  
values)  
Specifies the white balance preset  
value.  
Makes settings related  
to white balance preset  
values.  
Color Temp  
Balance<P>  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Specifies finer color temperature  
settings, for use when satisfactory  
video cannot be obtained with Color  
Temp<P>.  
R Gain <P>  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
On/Off  
Specifies the R gain preset value.  
Specifies the B gain preset value.  
Turns on and off execution of the  
AWB (auto white balance) function  
when the WHITE BAL switch is set  
to PRST.  
B Gain <P>  
AWB Enable <P>  
White Filter  
Makes settings related  
to filters.  
ND Filter C.Temp  
On/Off  
Turns the function that assigns  
electrical CC filters to ND filters on  
or off.  
ND FLT C.Temp<1> 3200K/4300K/5600K/  
Selects the color temperature for  
when electrical CC filters are  
assigned to ND filters.  
6300K  
ND FLT C.Temp<2- 3200K/4300K/5600K/  
Selects the color temperature for  
when electrical CC filters are  
assigned to ND filters.  
4>  
6300K  
Electrical CC<A>  
3200K/4300K/5600K/  
6300K  
Selects the color temperature for  
when the electrical CC filter  
switching function is assigned to an  
assignable switch.  
Electrical CC<B>  
Electrical CC<C>  
3200K/4300K/5600K/  
6300K  
Selects the color temperature for  
when the electrical CC filter  
switching function is assigned to an  
assignable switch.  
3200K/4300K/5600K/  
6300K/-----  
Selects the color temperature for  
when the electrical CC filter  
switching function is assigned to an  
assignable switch.  
Select “----” if you do not want to  
use C.  
Electrical CC<D>  
3200K/4300K/5600K/  
6300K/-----  
Selects the color temperature for  
when the electrical CC filter  
switching function is assigned to an  
assignable switch.  
Select “----” if you do not want to  
use D.  
Menu List  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Auto Iris2  
Makes settings related  
to auto iris.  
Iris Window  
1/2/3/4/5/6/Var  
Selects the type of iris detection  
window.  
Var: Variable  
Iris Window Ind  
On/Off  
Turns on or off the function that  
displays a frame marker for the auto  
iris detection window.  
Iris Level  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Adjusts the level of the auto iris  
target value.  
Iris APL Ratio  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris  
detection peak value and average  
value.  
Iris Var Width  
Iris Var Height  
Iris Var H Position  
Iris Var V Position  
Iris Speed  
40 to 500 to 999  
70 to 500 to 999  
–479 to 0 to +479  
–464 to 0 to +464  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Adjusts the width of the detection  
window when the setting of Iris  
Window is VAR.  
Adjusts the height of the detection  
window when the setting of Iris  
Window is VAR.  
Specifies the horizontal position of  
the detection window when the  
setting of Iris Window is VAR.  
Specifies the vertical position of the  
detection window when the setting  
of Iris Window is VAR.  
Specifies the control speed (speed of  
reaction to changes in the video).  
(Larger values specify quicker  
reaction times.)  
Clip High Light  
Mode  
On/Off  
Turns on or off the function that  
disregards highlights and forces a  
flatter reaction to high luminance.  
Enables or disables flicker  
reduction.  
On: Always enabled.  
Auto: Enabled when flicker is  
detected.  
Flicker Reduce  
Auto/On/Off  
Makes settings related  
to flicker reduction.  
Reduces the flicker that  
can occur when a  
subject is shot under a  
light source with a  
periodically varying  
brightness, such as  
fluorescent lights, due  
to the relationship with  
the camcorder’s  
Off: Disabled  
Frequency  
60Hz/50Hz  
Set to the frequency of the lighting  
fixture that is causing the flicker.  
(The factory default setting is 50 Hz  
when the Country setting is  
PAL Area”, 60 Hz when it is other  
than “PAL Area”.)  
recording frame rate.  
Genlock  
Makes settings related  
to genlock.  
H Phase(HD)  
H Phase(SD)  
Reference  
–999 to 0 to +999  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Internal/Genlock  
Specifies the H phase of HD output  
when genlock is enabled.  
Specifies the H phase of SD output  
when genlock is enabled.  
Displays the type of reference signal  
used by the camcorder.  
Menu List  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
ND Comp  
ND Offset Adjust  
On/Off  
ND filter color compensation  
function.  
Makes settings related  
to ND filter color  
compensation.  
Clear ND Offset  
Execute/Cancel  
Clears ND filter color compensation  
values (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
Although the  
differences are very  
slight, each of the built-  
in ND filters has  
different color  
characteristics. When  
you switch between ND  
filters, the white  
balance may be  
disturbed. You can  
correct for these slight  
color differences  
automatically by  
registering  
compensation values  
for each filter.  
Lens  
Auto FB Adjust  
Execute/Cancel  
Executes auto flange back  
Executes auto flange  
back adjustment.  
adjustment, only for supported  
lenses (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
Trigger Mode  
i.LINK Trigger  
Mode  
Internal/Both/External  
Select Internal when recording start  
and stop operations target S×S  
memory cards only. Select External  
when they target only devices  
connected to the i.LINK (HDV/DV)  
or HD/SD SDI OUT connectors.  
Select Both when they target both  
memory cards and external devices.  
Sets the current date and time.  
Selects the 12-hour format (12H) or  
the 24-hour format (24H) for  
display of times.  
Makes settings related  
to triggers for starting  
and stopping recording.  
Clock Set  
Sets the internal clock.  
Date/Time  
12H/24H  
12H/24H  
Date Mode  
Language  
YYMMDD/MMDDYY/ Selects the display format for dates.  
DDMMYY  
YYMMDD: Year, Month, Day  
MMDDYY: Month, Day, Year  
DDMMYY: Day, Month Year  
Selects the language for messages  
from English or Chinese.  
Language  
Selects the language for  
messages.  
English/Chinese  
Hours Meter  
Hours(Sys)  
Hours(Reset)  
Reset  
Displays the cumulative hours of  
use (cannot be reset).  
Makes settings related  
to the digital hours  
meter.  
Displays the hours of use (can be  
reset).  
Execute/Cancel  
Resets Hours(Reset) to 0.  
(Execute by selecting Execute.)  
Menu List  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTENANCE  
Menu items  
Version  
Displays the version of  
the camcorder, and  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Version  
Displays the software version of the  
camcorder (Vx.xx).  
Version Up  
Execute/Cancel  
Updates the camcorder (execute by  
selecting Execute).  
updates the camcorder.  
Note  
This cannot be selected unless an SxS  
memory card is inserted.  
FILE Menu  
FILE  
Menu items  
All  
Makes settings related  
to ALL file operations.  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Display Mode  
Date&Time/Model  
Name  
Selects the items to be displayed in  
the list box that appears when a file  
is saved or loaded.  
All File Load  
All File Save  
File ID  
Execute/Cancel  
Execute/Cancel  
Loads an ALL file (execute by  
selecting Execute).  
Stores an ALL file (execute by  
selecting Execute).  
Assigns a name to a file. Names can  
be up to 16 characters in length.  
Return all items to their preset  
values (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
All Preset  
Execute/Cancel  
Execute/Cancel  
Store All Preset  
Store the current settings of all items  
as the preset values (execute by  
selecting Execute).  
Clear All Preset  
3Sec Clr Preset  
Execute/Cancel  
Clear the preset values of all items  
(execute by selecting Execute).  
Turns on or off the function that  
clears each preset value when the  
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE  
switch is pushed up and held for  
three seconds on the CANCEL/  
PRST side.  
On/Off  
Menu List  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
FILE  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
s1  
Settings  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Description  
Scene  
Makes settings related  
to scene file operations.  
File number and file ID  
s2  
File number and file ID  
s3  
File number and file ID  
s4  
File number and file ID  
s5  
File number and file ID  
sStandard  
Display Mode  
Standard settings  
Date&Time/Model  
Name  
Selects the items to be displayed in  
the list box that appears when a file  
is saved or loaded.  
Scene Recall Mem  
Scene Store Mem  
Scene Recall S×S  
Scene Store S×S  
File ID  
Execute/Cancel  
Execute/Cancel  
Execute/Cancel  
Execute/Cancel  
Loads a file from internal memory  
(execute by selecting Execute).  
Stores a file in internal memory  
(execute by selecting Execute).  
Loads a file from an S×S memory  
card (execute by selecting Execute).  
Stores a file to an S×S memory card  
(execute by selecting Execute).  
Assigns a name to a file. Names can  
be up to 16 characters in length.  
Stores the current settings of  
reference file items in the reference  
file that is maintained in internal  
memory (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
Reference  
Reference Store  
Execute/Cancel  
Makes settings related  
to reference file  
operations.  
Reference Clear  
Reference Load  
Execute/Cancel  
Execute/Cancel  
Clear the reference file (execute by  
selecting Execute).  
Load a reference file from an S×S  
memory card (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
Reference Save  
Execute/Cancel  
Store a reference file to an S×S  
memory card (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
File ID  
Assigns a name to a file. Names can  
be up to 16 characters in length.  
Selects whether to load (On) or not  
load (Off) white balance data when  
Scene >Scene Recall or Scene  
>Standard is executed.  
Scene White Data  
On/Off  
Menu List  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FILE  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Lens  
Display Mode  
Date&Time/Model  
Name  
Selects the items to be displayed in  
the list box that appears when a file  
is saved or loaded.  
Makes settings related  
to lens file operations.  
Lens Recall Mem  
Lens Store Mem  
Lens Recall S×S  
Lens Store S×S  
File ID  
Execute/Cancel  
Execute/Cancel  
Execute/Cancel  
Execute/Cancel  
Loads a file from internal memory  
(execute by selecting Execute).  
Stores a file in internal memory  
(execute by selecting Execute).  
Loads a file from an S×S memory  
card (execute by selecting Execute).  
Stores a file to an S×S memory card  
(execute by selecting Execute).  
Assigns a name to the most recently  
loaded file. Names can be up to 16  
characters in length.  
Source  
Displays the number of the selected  
file.  
Lens No Offset  
Lens Auto Recall  
Execute/Cancel  
Clears a file (execute by selecting  
Execute).  
Off/On/Serial Number  
When the installed lens supports  
serial communication, specifies  
whether to automatically load that  
reference file.  
Off: Do not use this function.  
On: Load the reference for the  
model name and reflect the  
contents of the file.  
Serial Number: For lenses that  
support serial number  
communication, load the lens  
file that corresponds to the  
serial number and model name,  
and reflect the contents of that  
file. For lenses that do not  
support serial number  
communication, load the  
reference for the model name  
(in the same way as when On is  
selected).  
Serial Number  
Lens ID  
Displays the serial number of the  
installed lens (only for lenses that  
support serial communication).  
Displays the model name of the  
installed lens (only for lenses that  
support serial communication).  
Displays the name of the  
L Manufacturer  
manufacturer of the installed lens  
(only for lenses that support serial  
communication).  
M V Modulation  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Sets a vertical SAW shading  
compensation value in the lens file.  
Menu List  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FILE  
Menu items  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Description  
Lens  
Lens Center H  
–40 to 0 to 40  
Sets a center marker horizontal  
position in the lens file.  
Makes settings related  
to lens file operations.  
Lens Center V  
–40 to 0 to 40  
Sets a center marker vertical  
position in the lens file.  
Lens R Flare  
Lens G Flare  
Lens B Flare  
Lens W-R Offset  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Sets a R flare level in the lens file.  
Sets a G flare level in the lens file.  
Sets a B flare level in the lens file.  
Sets a R white balance  
compensation value in the lens file.  
Sets a B white balance  
compensation value in the lens file.  
Selects the white shading  
compensation target.  
Lens W-B Offset  
Shading Ch Sel  
L R/G/B H Saw  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Red/Green/Blue  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Sets a horizontal SAW white  
shading compensation value in the  
lens file.  
L R/G/B H Para  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Sets a horizontal parabola white  
shading compensation value in the  
lens file.  
L R/G/B V Saw  
L R/G/B V Para  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Sets a vertical SAW white shading  
compensation value in the lens file.  
Sets a vertical parabola white  
shading compensation value in the  
lens file.  
–99 to 0 to +99  
Menu List  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches  
Using the Assignable SW item of the OPERATION menu, you can assign user-specified functions to the  
ASSIGN. 0 to 3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, the COLOR TEMP. button, and the RET  
button on the lens.  
The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from the factory.  
Switch or button  
ASSIGN. 0 switch  
ASSIGN. 1 switch  
Function  
Assignable SW setting  
No assignment  
Off  
Execute EZ mode, according to the setting of  
OPERATION >TLCS.  
EZ Mode  
ASSIGN. 2 switch  
ASSIGN. 3 switch  
No assignment  
No assignment  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
ASSIGNABLE 4 switch No assignment  
ASSIGNABLE 5 switch No assignment  
RET button  
During recording or playback: Write a shot mark. Lens RET  
In the other states: Conduct a recording review  
(if playback is allowed).  
COLOR TEMP. button  
Adjust the white balance with the preset white  
balance value of 5600K.  
Color Temp SW 5600K  
Functions that can be assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 switch  
Assignable switch setting Function  
State when camcorder  
is next powered on  
Off  
No assignment  
Marker  
ATW Hold  
Turn the display of all markers on or off.  
Setting retained  
Hold the white balance setting in the ATW (auto-tracking —  
white balance) mode  
Picture Cache  
Freeze Mix  
Focus Mag  
Zebra  
Turn the picture cache function on or off.  
Execute the freeze mix function.  
Turn the focus magnification function on or off.  
Turn zebra display on or off.  
Write Shot Mark1.  
Setting retained  
Setting not retained  
Setting not retained  
Shot Mark1  
Shot Mark2  
OK Mark  
Write Shot Mark2.  
Add or delete an OK mark.  
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
     
Functions that can be assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 switch  
Note  
Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch or you switch the recording format, the setting of the  
switch at that point may not match the camcorder’s internal state. After assigning a function, switch the ASSIGN. 2  
switch or power the camcorder off and on again.  
Assignable switch setting Function  
Off  
No assignment  
Front Mic  
Marker  
Switch between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected.  
Turn the display of all markers on or off.  
Turn the picture cache function on or off.  
a)  
Picture Cache  
Zebra  
Turn zebra display on or off.  
Digital Extender  
Turn the screen magnification function on or off (only when the option for digital  
extender is installed).  
Note  
a) Immediately after you assign a functionThe OPERATION >Rec Function item in the setup menu is disabled (displayed  
in grey) and cannot be set when the Picture Cache function is turned on.  
Functions that can be assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 switches, the  
ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, and the COLOR TEMP. button  
Assignable switch setting Function  
State when camcorder  
is next powered on  
Off  
No assignment  
Front Mic  
Switch between stereo (On) and monaural (Off) when a Setting retained  
stereo microphone is connected.  
Marker  
Turn the display of all markers on or off.  
Delete the most recently recorded clip.  
Setting retained  
Last Clip Delete  
ATW  
Turn ATW (auto tracing white balance) mode on or off. Setting not retained  
ATW Hold  
EZ Mode  
Hold the white balance setting in the ATW mode.  
Execute EZ mode according to the setting of  
OPERATION >TLCS.  
Setting retained  
Turbo Gain  
Execute Turbo Gain according to the setting of  
OPERATION >Gain Switch >Gain Turbo.  
Setting not retained  
Rec Review  
Rec  
Conduct a recording review.  
Start or stop recording.  
Picture Cache  
Freeze Mix  
Spotlight  
Turn the picture cache function on or off.  
Execute the freeze mix function.  
Setting retained  
Setting not retained  
Setting retained  
Turn the spotlight function in auto iris mode on or off.  
Backlight  
Turn the backlight function in auto iris mode on or off. Setting retained  
EVF Mode  
Switch the viewfinder screen between B&W (On) and  
color (Off).  
Setting retained  
BRT Disp  
Histogram  
Turn the display of the brightness level on or off.  
Turn the histogram display on or off.  
Setting retained  
Setting retained  
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
         
Assignable switch setting Function  
State when camcorder  
is next powered on  
Lens Info  
Switch the depth of field indication between off,  
Setting retained  
displayed in meters, and displayed in feet.  
Zoom Tele/Wide  
When a lens that supports serial communication is  
installed, assign the Zoom Tele function to  
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assign the Zoom Wide function to  
ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when <4> and <5> are  
set).  
Zoom Wide/Tele  
When a lens that supports serial communication is  
installed, assign the Zoom Wide function to  
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assign the Zoom Tele function to  
ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when <4> and <5> are  
set).  
Manual Focus Assist  
Focus Mag  
Zebra  
Turn the manual focus assist function on or off.  
Turn the focus magnification function on or off.  
Turn zebra display on or off.  
Setting retained  
Setting not retained  
Setting not retained  
Lens RET  
During recording or playback: Write a shot mark.  
In the other states: Conduct a recording review  
(if playback is allowed).  
a)  
Display return video signals.  
Return Video  
Shot Mark1  
Write Shot Mark1.  
Shot Mark2  
Write Shot Mark2.  
OK Mark  
Add or delete an OK mark.  
Adjust the white balance with a 3200K preset value.  
Color Temp SW 3200K  
Setting retained  
Color Temp SW 4300K  
Color Temp SW 5600K  
Color Temp SW 6300K  
Electrical CC  
Adjust the white balance with a 4300K preset value.  
Adjust the white balance with a 5600K preset value.  
Adjust the white balance with a 6300K preset value.  
Setting retained  
Setting retained  
Setting retained  
Setting retained  
Function that switches the electrical CC filter (3200K/  
4300K/5600K/6300K) applied to white balance  
adjustment values.  
Each press of the switch or button switches in the order  
3200Kt4300Kt5600Kt6300K.  
These can also be applied from a menu (apply with  
Electrical CC<A><B><C><D>).  
Note  
This function is not available when White Filter >ND  
Filter C.Temp in the Maintenance menu is set to On.  
If you set ND Filter C.Temp to On after assigning the  
function, the assignable switch ceases to function.  
CC5600K  
Apply a 5600K electrical CC filter to white balance  
adjustment values.  
Setting retained  
a)  
Turn the screen magnification function on or off (only  
when the option for digital extender is installed).  
Setting not retained  
Digital Extender  
a) Not available in this version.  
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
 
Functions that can be assigned to the RET button on the lens  
Assignable switch setting Function  
State when camcorder  
is next powered on  
Off  
No assignment  
Lens RET  
During recording or playback: Write a shot mark.  
In the other states: Conduct a recording review (if  
playback is allowed).  
Return Video  
Rec Review  
Shot Mark1  
Shot Mark2  
OK Mark  
Display return video signals.  
Execute recording review.  
Write Shot Mark1.  
Write Shot Mark2.  
Add or delete an OK mark.  
Turn the focus magnification function on or off.  
Focus Mag  
Setting not retained  
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
   
Adjusting Picture Characteristics to Match the PMW-  
EX1R  
You can make the following menu settings to adjust picture characteristics to match those of the PMW-  
EX1R.  
Menu item  
Setting  
HD  
SD  
PAINT >Black Gamma  
Black Gamma: OFF  
Black Gamma: ON  
Gamma Level: –16  
Preset Select: 4  
Gamma Select: 4 240M  
PAINT >Matrix  
PAINT >Gamma  
Preset Select: 6  
Gamma Select: 5 R709  
Adjusting Picture Characteristics to Match the PMW-EX1R  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
 
Chapter7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data  
Saving Setting Data  
Saving and Loading  
Settings  
This section explains how to save setting data in  
an ALL file.  
Before starting, insert a writable S×S memory  
card into a memory card slot.  
information about menu operations.  
You can save setup menu settings in the  
camcorder’s internal memory and on S×S  
memory cards. This allows you to quickly recall  
an appropriate set of menu settings for the current  
situation.  
Setting data is saved in the following categories.  
ALL files: ALL files save the setting data of all  
menus. You can save up to 64 ALL files on  
an S×S memory card.  
1
Select FILE >All in the setup menu.  
To assign a name to the data before saving  
it  
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.  
Note  
2
Select All File Save >Execute.  
An ALL file list box appears.  
File numbers where “No File” is displayed  
are empty file numbers. File numbers with a  
file name or a date and time are the number  
of files that already contain data.  
Device specific data (shading, output levels, and  
other data that requires adjustment for the specific  
device) is not saved.  
Scene files: Scene file save adjustments to  
PAINT menu items for the purpose of  
shooting a particular scene. You can save up  
to five scene files in the camcorder’s internal  
memory and up to 64 scene files on an S×S  
memory card.  
3
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to select the  
desired file number.  
Reference files: Reference files save the  
reference values that are set when you  
execute FILE >Scene > Standard in the setup  
menu. You can save one reference file in the  
camcorder’s internal memory and one on an  
S×S memory card.  
Lens files: Lens files save the setting data used to  
compensate for lens characteristics, such as  
flare, white shading, white balance and  
center markers. You can save up to 32 lens  
files in the camcorder’s internal memory and  
up to 64 lens files on an S×S memory card.  
Press the MENU knob.  
A confirmation message appears.  
To execute the save, select [Execute],  
and then press the MENU knob.  
To cancel the save, select [Cancel], and  
then press the MENU knob.  
If you choose to execute the save, the  
ACCESS lamp lights. A completion message  
appears and the ACCESS lamp goes out  
when the data has been saved to the S×S  
memory card.  
The first settings stored in a file are called  
“preset” values.  
Even after loading files to set up the camcorder,  
and overwriting original files with new settings,  
you can still recover preset values and reset files  
to their initial states (see page 135).  
If an error message appears  
One of the following error messages may appear  
during execution of the save, or as soon as you  
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not saved  
to the S×S memory card.  
Saving and Loading Settings  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to select the  
desired file number.  
Error message Problem  
What to do  
NG:Cannot Save No recordable Insert  
media is  
recordable  
media.  
Press the MENU knob.  
A confirmation message appears.  
inserted.  
NG:Media Full The media is  
full.  
Use media with  
free capacity  
remaining.  
To execute the load, select [Execute],  
and then press the MENU knob.  
To cancel the load, select [Cancel], and  
then press the MENU knob.  
To assign names to files  
Assigning a name before you save data in an ALL  
file can make it easier to distinguish your files.  
The following characters can be used in file  
names.  
Alphanumeric characters (a–z, A–Z, 0–9) and  
special characters ( ! # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < =  
> ? @ [ \ ] ~)  
If you choose to execute the load, the  
ACCESS lamp lights. The ACCESS lamp  
goes out and a completion message appears  
when the data has been loaded from the S×S  
memory card.  
If an error message appears  
One of the following error messages may appear  
during execution of the load, or as soon as you  
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not loaded  
from the S×S memory card.  
1
2
Select FILE >All >File ID in the setup  
menu.  
Turn the MENU knob to select a  
character, and then press the MENU  
knob.  
Error message Problem  
• There is no  
What to do  
Insert the  
NG:No Data  
readable  
media  
• The specified  
file does not  
exist on the  
media  
media that  
contains the file  
you want.  
3
4
Repeat step 3.  
When you have finished entering  
characters, press the MENU knob to  
move the cursor to “SET”, and then  
press the MENU knob.  
Resetting a File after Changing Its  
Contents  
The specified name is displayed.  
When you save the file (see page 134), the  
data will be saved under this name.  
information about menu operations.  
Loading Setting Data  
1
2
Select FILE >All in the setup menu.  
Select [All Preset], and then press the  
MENU knob.  
Note  
When you load a file from an S×S memory card, the data  
saved in the camcorder’s internal memory is overwritten.  
3
To execute the reset, select [Execute],  
and then press the MENU knob.  
To cancel the reset, select [Cancel], and  
then press the MENU knob.  
If you choose to execute the reset, all settings  
in the ALL file are reset to preset values.  
information about menu operations.  
1
2
Select FILE >All in the setup menu.  
Select All File Load >Execute.  
A list box of ALL files appears.  
File numbers where “No File” is displayed  
are empty file numbers. File numbers with a  
file name or a date and time are the number  
of files that already contain data.  
Saving and Loading Settings  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5
To execute the save, select [Execute],  
and then press the MENU knob.  
To cancel the save, select [Cancel], and  
then press the MENU knob.  
If you selected Scene Store S×S in step 2, the  
ACCESS lamp lights when you execute the  
save.  
Saving and Loading  
Scene Files  
When the data has been saved to the S×S  
memory card, a completion message appears  
and the ACCESS lamp goes out.  
Scene files allow you to save the following types  
of data.  
• Values set in the PAINT menu  
• Shutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS  
mode  
Loading Scene Files  
• White balance data  
The data that is saved and loaded depends on the  
setting of FILE >Reference >Scene White Data  
in the setup menu.  
To load a scene file from an S×S memory card,  
insert the S×S memory card into a memory card  
slot, and then proceed as follows.  
information about menu operations.  
Saving Scene Files  
1
2
Select FILE >Scene in the setup menu.  
To save a scene file to an S×S memory card,  
insert the card into a memory card slot and then  
proceed as follows.  
Select Scene Recall Mem or Scene  
Recall S×S.  
Select Scene Recall Mem if you want to load  
the file from the camcorder’s internal  
memory, and select Scene Recall (S×S) if  
you want to load the file from an S×S  
memory card.  
information about menu operations.  
1
Select FILE >Scene in the setup menu.  
To assign a name to the data before saving  
it  
3
Press the MENU knob.  
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.  
A list box of scene files appears. File  
numbers where “No File” is displayed are  
empty file numbers.  
2
Select Scene Store Mem or Scene Store  
S×S.  
Select Scene Store Mem if you want to save  
the data in the camcorder’s internal memory,  
and select Scene Store S×S if you want to  
save the data on an S×S memory card.  
4
5
Select the desired file number, and then  
press the MENU knob.  
A confirmation message appears.  
To execute the load, select [Execute],  
and then press the MENU knob.  
To cancel the load, select [Cancel], and  
then press the MENU knob.  
If you selected Scene Recall S×S in step 2,  
the ACCESS lamp lights when you execute  
the load.  
When the data has been loaded from the S×S  
memory card, a completion message appears  
and the ACCESS lamp goes out.  
3
4
Press the MENU knob.  
A list box of scene files appears.  
File numbers where “No File” is displayed  
are empty file numbers  
Select the file number under which you  
want to save the data, and then press the  
MENU knob.  
A confirmation message appears.  
Saving and Loading Scene Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
         
Note  
Saving and Loading  
Lens Files  
The settings data (ALL file, scene file, reference file,  
lens file) of this camcorder and the PMW-350 are not  
compatible.  
Setting Lens File Data  
Use FILE >Lens (see page 127) in the setup menu  
to set the data in lens files.  
You can set the following data and save it as a  
lens file.  
Setting data  
Sub-items  
V modulation shading  
compensation values  
Center marker position  
M V Modulation  
Lens Center H  
Lens Center V  
Lens R Flare  
Flare level  
Lens G Flare  
Lens B Flare  
White balance  
compensation value  
White shading  
Lens W-R Offset  
Lens W-B Offset  
L R/G/B H Saw  
L R/G/B H Para  
L R/G/B V Saw  
L R/G/B V Para  
compensation value  
information about menu operations.  
Saving Lens Files  
To save a lens file to an S×S memory card, insert  
the card into a memory card slot and then proceed  
as follows.  
information about menu operations.  
1
Select FILE >Lens in the setup menu.  
To assign a name to the data before saving  
it  
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.  
Saving and Loading Lens Files  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
3
Select Lens Store Mem or Lens Store  
S×S, and press the MENU knob.  
Select Lens Store Mem if you want to save  
the data in the camcorder’s internal memory,  
and select Lens Store S×S if you want to save  
the data on an S×S memory card.  
To cancel the load, select [Cancel], and  
then press the MENU knob.  
If you select [Execute], a list box of lens files  
appears. File numbers where “No File” is  
displayed are empty file numbers.  
4
5
Select the desired file number, and then  
press the MENU knob.  
A confirmation message appears.  
To execute the save, select [Execute],  
and then press the MENU knob.  
To cancel the save, select [Cancel], and  
then press the MENU knob.  
If you select [Execute], a list box of lens file  
number appears. File numbers where “No  
File” is displayed are empty file numbers.  
To execute the load, select [Execute],  
and then press the MENU knob.  
To cancel the load, select [Cancel], and  
then press the MENU knob.  
If you selected Lens Recall S×S in step 2, the  
ACCESS lamp lights when you execute the  
load.  
When the specified lens file has been loaded  
from the S×S memory card, a completion  
message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes  
out.  
4
5
Select the file number under which you  
want to save the data, and then press the  
MENU knob.  
A confirmation message appears.  
To execute the save, select [Execute],  
and then press the MENU knob.  
To cancel the save, select [Cancel], and  
then press the MENU knob.  
Loading Lens Files Automatically  
If you selected Lens Store S×S in step 2, the  
ACCESS lamp lights when you execute the  
save.  
When the data has been saved to the S×S  
memory card, a completion message appears  
and the ACCESS lamp goes out.  
When you are using a lens that support serial  
communication, you can set up the camcorder by  
automatically loading the lens file that  
corresponds to the lens settings (Lens Auto Recall  
function).  
To use the Lens Auto Recall function, set FILE  
>Lens >Lens Auto Recall in the setup menu to  
one of the following.  
On: Load the lens file that corresponds to the  
model name.  
Off: Do not use the Lens Auto Recall function.  
Serial Number: Load the lens file that  
corresponds to the model name and serial  
number (when the lens supports  
Loading Lens Files  
To load a lens file from an S×S memory card,  
insert the S×S memory card into a memory card  
slot, and then proceed as follows.  
information about menu operations.  
communication of the serial number).  
If the lens does not support communication of the  
serial number, both settings load the lens file that  
corresponds to the model name.  
1
2
Select FILE >Lens in the setup menu.  
Select Lens Recall Mem or Lens Recall  
S×S, and press the MENU knob.  
Select Lens Recall Mem if you want to load  
the file from the camcorder’s internal  
memory, and select Lens Recall S×S if you  
want to load the file from an S×S memory  
card.  
3
To execute the load, select [Execute],  
and then press the MENU knob.  
Saving and Loading Lens Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
       
Chapter8  
Connecting External Devices  
You can connect an RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit and operate this camcorder. For connection and  
operation of the RM-B150/B750, refer to the Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM (labeled “Manuals for  
Solid-State Memory Camcorder”).  
Connecting External Monitors  
Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected.  
BNC cable (not supplied)  
HDMI cable (not supplied)  
BNC cable (not supplied)  
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the  
same status information and menus can be  
displayed on the external monitor as those on the  
following restrictions:  
viewfinder screen.  
Note  
SD signals down-converted for output have the  
Images of 50P/50i/25P are output as PAL signals, those  
of 59.94P/59.94i/29.97P are output as NTSC signals, and  
those of 23.98P are output as 2-3 pulled-down NTSC  
signals.  
Connecting External Monitors  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
HD/SD SDI OUT connector (BNC)  
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector  
The HD/SD SDI OUT connector can be used to  
connect a device that supports SDI. The device  
type can be a monitor, switcher, or VTR or other  
recording device.  
The output from this connector can be turned on  
and off with OPERATION >Input/Output >SDI  
Output in the setup menu (see page 96).  
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).  
The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector supports HDV  
and DV input/output. However, DV streams  
cannot be recorded on this camcorder.  
This connector can be used to connect a device  
that supports i.LINK (HDV). The device type can  
be a monitor, read/write device such as VTR or  
HDD, or computer.  
To input/output HDV signals  
HDV input/output is supported when the video  
format is an HDV compatible format (SP 1440/  
59.94i, SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.98P), Input/  
Output >Output&i.LINK in the OPERATION  
menu is set to [HD&HDV] or [SD&HDV], and  
Input/Output >i.LINK I/O is set to [Enable].  
When the video format is SP 1440/23.98P, a  
59.94i HDV signal subjected to 2-3 pulldown  
processing is output.  
HDMI connector  
The HDMI connector can be used to connect a  
device that supports HDMI. The device type can  
be a monitor or VTR or other recording device.  
The output from this connector can be turned on  
and off with OPERATION >Input/Output  
>HDMI Output in the setup menu (see page 96).  
For connection, use an HDMI cable (not  
supplied).  
To input/output DV signals  
DV input/output is supported under either of the  
VIDEO OUT connector  
following conditions.  
• Input/Output >i.LINK I/O in the OPERATION  
menu is set to [Enable] on SD mode.  
• On HD mode, the video format is other than DV  
incompatible formats (HQ 1920/23.98P, HQ  
1440/23.98P, and HQ 1280/23.98P), Input/  
Output >Output&i.LINK is set to [SD&DV],  
and Input/Output >i.LINK I/O is set to  
[Enable].  
The VIDEO OUT connector can be used to  
connect a device that supports analog composite  
signal. The device type can be a monitor or VTR  
or other recording device.  
The analog composite signal output from this  
connector is the same as the NTSC or PAL  
encoded signal that is output from the HD/SD  
SDI OUT connector when the setting of output is  
SD signal (you can switch between NTSC and  
PAL with OPERATION >Format >Country in  
the setup menu (see page 94)).  
To input the VIDEO OUT connector output  
signal to an external analog composite device, it  
may be necessary to change the input signal  
setting of that external device to be matched with  
the analog composite signal setting for the  
VIDEO OUT connector.  
To input camcorder output audio to an external  
device such as a monitor or VTR or other  
recording device, connect the audio output of the  
AUDIO OUT connector to the audio input of that  
external device.  
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).  
Connecting External Monitors  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
With a Macintosh computer  
An icon is displayed on the menu bar.  
Operating Clips with a  
Computer  
To connect with a USB cable  
When you connect the camcorder or the SBAC-  
US10 S×S Memory Card USB Reader/Writer  
(optional) using a USB cable (not supplied), the  
memory card in the slot is acknowledged as an  
extended drive by the computer.  
When two memory cards are mounted in this  
camcorder, they are acknowledged as two  
independent extended drives by the computer.  
The clips recorded on S×S memory cards with  
this camcorder can be controlled on a computer or  
edited using the optional nonlinear editing  
software.  
For these purposes, the clips on an S×S memory  
card can be operated by directly loading the card  
in a computer or by connecting the camcorder or  
the optional SBAC-US10 S×S Memory Card  
USB Reader/Writer to the computer, using an  
USB cable as shown below.  
S×S memory card  
Preparations  
To use the ExpressCard slot of a computer  
If the computer is equipped with an ExpressCard/  
34 or ExpressCard/54 slot, you can directly insert  
the S×S memory card containing clips recorded  
with this camcorder and access to the files.  
USB cable  
(not supplied)  
For the operating requirements for the computer, see  
Note  
The S×S Device Driver Software on the CD-ROM  
supplied with the camcorder must be installed on your  
computer. Before installation, be sure to read the  
enclosed S×S Device Driver Software End-User License  
Agreement.  
For information on installation of the driver  
software, refer to the ReadMe on the supplied CD-  
ROM.  
Notes  
• When connecting the USB cable to the computer, be  
careful to check the form and direction of the USB  
connector.  
• The camcorder does not work on the bus power from  
the computer.  
For support information for the driver software, visit  
the following URL:  
http://www.sony.net/S×S-Support/  
To connect a computer to the USB  
connector  
To the ExpressCard slot  
Note  
S×S memory card  
Computer with S×S  
When a computer is connected to the USB connector of  
the camcorder and at the same time an optional  
PHU-60K/120K/120R Professional Harddisk Unit  
(powered from a battery) is connected to the computer,  
battery exhaustion on the PHU-60K/120K/120R  
(indicated by a Battery End warning) disables the  
following.  
Device Driver  
Software installed  
With a Windows computer  
Check that a Removable Disk appears in My  
Computer. This indicates normal status.  
Operating Clips with a Computer  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
• To guard the PHU-60K/120K/120R against access  
from the computer  
Disabling the USB connection  
To disable the USB connection, follow the same  
procedure as that for removing a device from the  
computer.  
To enable the USB connection again, first  
disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it.  
The message “Connect USB Now?” appears  
again.  
• To disconnect the PHU-60K/120K/120R’s cable from  
the memory card slot or plug again the cable into the  
slot  
• To turn on the tally indicator on the viewfinder screen  
to warn the operator  
When you connect a computer to the USB  
connector with a USB cable (not supplied), the  
message “Connect USB Now?” is displayed to  
prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable the  
USB connection.  
If you select “Cancel” or push the MENU  
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE down to the ESCAPE  
side or if you disconnect the USB cable, the  
message “Connect USB Now?” disappears.  
Note  
If you connect the camcorder to the computer using an  
i.LINK cable, you cannot use the computer to operate  
files stored in a recording media loaded in the memory  
card slot of this camcorder.  
To remove an S×S memory card  
Windows  
1. Click on the icon of “Safely Remove  
Hardware” on the task bar of the computer.  
2. Select “Safely remove S×S Memory Card -  
Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu.  
If you select “Execute” and press the MENU  
knob, the USB connection is enabled and this  
camcorder is recognized as an extension drive.  
You can carry out the same operations by using  
the arrow buttons (J, j, K, k) (see page 20).  
3. Check that the Safe To Remove Hardware  
message appears then remove the card.  
Macintosh  
Drag the S×S memory card icon on the desktop to  
Trash.  
If the S×S memory card icon is located on Finder,  
click on the eject icon on its side.  
Note  
Do not select “Card Power Off” from the S×S memory  
card icon displayed on the menu bar.  
If the USB connection is enabled during  
recording/playback operation, the operation is  
stopped and the message “USB Connecting”  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
To use the supplied application software  
To copy clips to the local disk of your computer  
and perform other management tasks, install the  
application software on the supplied CD-ROM.  
Install the application software on the supplied  
CD-ROM to your computer.  
Although the data regarding recorded materials  
are stored over multiple files and folders, you can  
easily handle the clips without considering such  
data and directory structure by using the  
application software.  
At this time, the output signal from the VIDEO  
OUT connector, HDMI connector, and HD/SD  
SDI OUT connector changes to a black signal.  
Notes  
• The camcorder cannot be operated for recording,  
playback, and so on while the message “USB  
Connecting” is displayed.  
• When the computer accesses the media loaded in the  
camcorder, do not try to carry out the following  
operations.  
- Operating the camcorder (turning the power on/off,  
switching the operation mode, etc.)  
Note  
If you operate, e.g. copy the clips on the S×S memory  
card by using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder  
(Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips  
may not be maintained. To avoid such a problem, use the  
application software.  
- Removing or loading a media from an active slot  
(being accessed from the computer)  
- Removing or connecting the USB cable  
Operating Clips with a Computer  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
For the operating requirements, see “XDCAM EX  
web sites” (page 11), and for installation and  
operations, refer to the User’s Guide contained in  
the CD-ROM.  
Connecting an External  
Device (i.LINK  
Connection)  
For support information on the application software,  
visit the web sites shown in “XDCAM EX web sites”  
(page 11) or on the cover page of the supplied CD-  
ROM.  
You can record the same images as those  
recorded on the memory card in this camcorder  
on an external device connected to the i.LINK  
(HDV/DV) connector, or record the playback  
picture of the external device on the memory card  
in the camcorder.  
When you connect the camcorder to a non-linear  
editing system that supports HDV format, you  
can edit the images recorded on the memory card  
in the camcorder.  
To use a nonlinear editing system  
For a nonlinear editing system, optional editing  
software that corresponds to the recording  
formats used with this camcorder is required.  
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your  
computer in advance, using the supplied  
application software.  
Some editing software may not operate properly.  
Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to  
the recording formats used with this camcorder.  
Notes  
• When you set OPERATION >Input/Output  
>Output&i.LINK in the setup menu to [480P (570P)],  
no signal is output from the HD/SD SDI OUT  
connector.  
To use Final Cut Pro of Apple Inc.  
It is necessary to convert the clips to files that can  
be edited with the Final Cut Pro.  
• Use the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector only for one-to-  
one i.LINK connection.  
For information on application software to perform  
the conversion, visit the web sites shown in “XDCAM  
EX web sites” (page 11) or on the cover page of the  
supplied CD-ROM.  
• When you change a setting which affects output  
signals from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector, such as  
HD/SD, HD System Line, System Frequency, and Rec  
Format under OPERATION >Format in the setup  
menu or i.LINK I/O and Down Converter under  
OPERATION >Input/Output in the setup menu,  
disconnect the i.LINK cable and change the setting.  
Changing such a setting with the i.LINK cable  
connected may cause improper operation of the  
connected i.LINK device.  
• The external signal input via the i.LINK connection  
that can be recorded on the camcorder is HDV streams  
only. You cannot record DV streams via the i.LINK  
connection.  
Recording the Camera Picture on  
an External Device  
The picture being shot with this camcorder is  
output as an HDV or DV stream via the i.LINK  
(HDV/DV) connector. It can be recorded on a  
connected HDV or DVCAM recorder in  
synchronization with a recording start/stop  
operation on this camcorder.  
1
Perform the preparatory settings of the  
camcorder.  
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
             
• Set OPERATION >Input/Output >Output  
& i.LINK in the setup menu (see page 96)  
to “HD & HDV” or “SD & HDV”.  
HD & HDV or SD & HDV: To output an  
HDV stream in HD mode when the  
video format is set to an HDV  
Nonlinear Editing  
You can transfer an HDV stream to a nonlinear  
editing system connected via the i.LINK (HDV/  
DV) connector.  
compatible format (SP 1440/59.94i,  
SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.94P)  
SD & DV: To output a DV stream  
• Set OPERATION >Input/Output >i.LINK  
I/O in the setup menu to [Enable].  
• Set MAINTENANCE >Trigger Mode  
>i.LINK Trigger Mode in the setup menu  
(see page 124) to [Both] or [External].  
Both: To perform recording both on the  
memory card in this camcorder and on  
the external device  
Notes  
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector of this camcorder is  
a 6-pin connector. Check the number of pins of the  
i.LINK connector on your computer and use an  
appropriate i.LINK cable.  
• In searching pictures of this camcorder on the  
computer, it may take some time until the display is  
reflected on the computer.  
• If the playback clip is short or the playback starting  
point is near the end of the clip, the i.LINK signal may  
be interrupted between the clip and the next clip. When  
you try to capture such a signal using the nonlinear  
editing system, a malfunction may occur, depending  
on the nonlinear editing software in use.  
External: To perform recording only on  
the external device  
• If you specify a search speed other than 4, 15, or 24  
times normal with the nonlinear editing system, no  
i.LINK signal is fed out. In such a case, the picture on  
the LCD monitor may stay frozen.  
• High-speed playback picture may not be displayed on  
the computer screen, depending on the nonlinear  
editing software in use.  
2
3
Set the external device to recording  
standby status.  
For operations of the external device, refer to  
the operation manual of that device.  
Start recording.  
The external device starts recording in  
synchronization.  
Setting on this camcorder  
Set OPERATION >Input/Output >i.LINK I/O in  
the setup menu to [Enable].  
The status of the external device is displayed in  
the i.LINK status indication area (see page 30) on  
the viewfinder screen.  
For operations of the nonlinear editing software,  
refer to the operation manual of the software.  
Indication  
Status of the external device  
Recording External Input Signals  
In HDV recording standby  
STBY  
zREC  
STBY  
zREC  
HDV  
HDV  
DV  
In HDV recording  
In DV recording standby  
In DV recording  
The HDV stream input from a device connected  
via the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector can be  
recorded on an S×S memory card in this  
camcorder.  
DV  
The timecodes superimposed on the i.LINK input  
are recorded regardless of the settings of the  
camcorder.  
Notes  
• Operation may be different depending on the type of  
external device.  
Note  
• There is some time lag from which you start recording  
until the i.LINK status indication changes. Even if  
MAINTENANCE >Trigger Mode >i.LINK Trigger  
Mode is set to [Both], the connected i.LINK device  
does not start recording until it is in synchronization  
with this camcorder.  
• While you can record shot marks on the memory card  
during recording, they are not added to the pictures  
recorded on the external device.  
DV stream cannot be recorded.  
1
Set the external signal to a format that  
can be recorded on the camcorder.  
Select an HDV compatible format (SP 1440/  
59.94i, SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.94P) for  
the video format.  
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
Make the following settings with  
OPERATION >Input/Output in the  
setup menu (see page 96).  
• Set Output&i.LINK to [HD&HDV] or  
[SD&HDV].  
• Set i.LINK I/O to [Enable].  
• Set Source Select to [i.LINK].  
The input video is displayed on the  
viewfinder screen or the monitor connected  
to the VIDEO OUT connector.  
Audio signals are output through the built-in  
speakers, the headphones connected to the  
EARPHONE connector, and the speaker of  
the monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
3
Start the recording.  
Notes  
• An error is generated in the following cases. In such a  
case, cancel Recording mode.  
- The video format of input signal does not match that  
specified on the camcorder.  
- A copy-protected stream is being fed in.  
• If the input to the camcorder becomes no signal during  
recording, the TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on  
the front of the viewfinder, and the REC indication  
(zREC) on the viewfinder screen flash, indicating that  
no signal is being recorded on the S×S memory card.  
When an input signal is resumed, recording is  
restarted, incrementing the clip number on the memory  
card.  
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
Chapter9 Maintenance  
Testing the Camcorder  
Maintenance  
Check the functions of the camcorder before  
setting out for a shooting session, preferably by  
recording and playing back video and audio  
signals.  
Cleaning the Viewfinder  
Use a dust blower to clean the lens, the LCD  
screen, and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.  
Note  
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.  
Note about the Battery Terminal  
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for  
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable  
part.  
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if  
the pins of the battery terminal are bent or  
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they  
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.  
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep  
the unit working properly and to prolong its  
usable lifetime.  
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for  
more information about inspections.  
Testing the Camcorder / Maintenance  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Operation Warnings  
If a problem occurs when the camcorder is powered or is being operated, a warning is issued by various  
visible and audible indicators. These visible and audible indicators are:  
• Warning message (“A” in the “Layout of the table of warning messages” below)  
• WARNING indicator (“B”), warning sound from the speaker and earphones (“C”), tally/REC indication  
(“D”), and battery remaining indicator (“E”).  
A warning message, and the REC indication appear on the viewfinder screen.  
The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted with the ALARM knob. Set the ALARM knob to the  
minimum position to suppress the sound.  
Layout of the table of warning messages  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
B
C
D
E
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
• The operation of the WARNING indicator, the tally/REC indication, and the battery indicator is  
represented by graphic symbols as follows.  
: Continuous  
: 1 flash/s  
: 4 flashes/s  
• The warning sounds are represented by graphic symbols as follows.  
: Continuous beep  
: 1 beep/s  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
Free space on the S×S Recording continues.  
memory card has  
Replace it with another at the earliest opportunity.  
become insufficient.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
No space is left on the Recording stops.  
S×S memory card.  
Recording, clip  
Replace it with another.  
copying and clip  
division cannot be  
performed.  
Operation Warnings  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The battery power will Recording continues.  
be exhausted soon.  
Charge the battery pack at the earliest  
opportunity.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The battery pack is  
exhausted. Recording  
cannot be performed.  
Recording stops.  
Connect a power source via the DC IN connector  
or stop operation to charge the battery pack.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The internal  
Recording continues.  
Suspend operation, turn off the power, and wait  
until the temperature falls.  
temperature has risen  
above a safe operation  
limit.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The DC IN voltage has Recording continues.  
become low (stage 1).  
Check the power supply.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The DC IN voltage is Recording stops.  
too low (stage 2).  
Connect other power source.  
Recording cannot be  
performed.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
An error was detected Recording stops.  
with the battery pack.  
Replace the battery pack with a normal one.  
Operation Warnings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The remaining power Recording continues.  
of the backup battery  
Refer to a Sony service representative to replace  
the battery with a new one.  
is insufficient.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
A partitioned memory Recording continues.  
card or one that  
This card cannot be used with this camcorder.  
Remove it and load a compatible card.  
contains recorded clips  
exceeding the number  
permitted with this  
camcorder is loaded.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The maximum number Recording stops.  
of clips for a single  
memory card is  
Replace it with another card.  
reached. No more clip  
can be recorded on the  
card.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
An error occurred with Recording stops.  
the memory card. The  
card requires  
Remove the card, load it again, and restore it.  
restoration.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
Recording cannot be Recording stops.  
done, as the memory  
card is defective.  
As playback may be possible, it is recommended  
to replace it with another card after copying the  
clips, as required.  
Operation Warnings  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
Neither recording nor Recording stops.  
playback can be done,  
as the memory card is  
defective.  
It cannot be operated with this camcorder.  
Replace it with another card.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
A card of a different  
file system was  
inserted.  
Recording stops.  
It cannot be used with this camcorder. Replace it  
with another card.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The external signal  
input via the i.LINK  
connection cannot be  
recorded, as the Video  
Format setting is  
Recording stops.  
Change settings of OPERATION >Format in the  
setup menu to match it to that of the external  
signal.  
different from the  
signal format of the  
external input signal.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The external signal  
input via the i.LINK  
connection cannot be  
recorded, as the stream  
is copy-protected.  
Recording stops.  
Check the input signal.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The external signal  
input via the i.LINK  
connection cannot be  
recorded, as it is a DV  
stream.  
Recording stops.  
Operation Warnings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
An error occurred in  
reading data from the  
memory card, and  
playback cannot be  
continued.  
Recording stops.  
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card  
after copying the clips, as required.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
Recording cannot be Recording stops.  
done, as an error  
If this frequently occurs, change the memory  
card.  
occurred with the  
memory card.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The battery power of  
the connected HDD  
will be exhausted  
soon.  
Change the battery at the earliest opportunity.  
Recording continues.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The battery of the  
Recording stops.  
Stop operation to change the battery.  
connected HDD is  
exhausted. Recording  
cannot be performed.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
There is not enough  
Recording continues  
Replace the card in slot A with another one.  
capacity for copying. (disallowing copy).  
Operation Warnings  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The card has already Recording continues  
Replace the card in slot A with another one.  
ten clips having the  
same name as that you  
tried to duplicate.  
(disallowing copy).  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
There is not enough  
Recording continues  
capacity for dividing a (disallowing divide).  
clip.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
Will switch to other  
slot soon.  
Recording continues.  
Make sure that a memory card is loaded in the  
other slot.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
There is no clip to be Recording continues.  
displayed.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
There is no clip with Recording continues.  
the OK mark.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The card has already Recording continues  
clips having the same (disallowing copy).  
name as that you tried  
Replace the card in slot A with another one.  
to duplicate.  
Operation Warnings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The memory card  
comes to the end of its  
service life.  
Recording stops.  
Make a backup copy and replace the card with  
another one as soon as possible. Recording/  
playback may not be performed properly if you  
continue to use the card.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions of  
the memory card.  
WARNING indicator Warning sound  
Tally/REC  
Battery remaining  
Problem  
Operation in the recorder Action to take  
module  
The inserted memory  
card contains clips  
recorded in a format  
that is not supported  
by this camcorder.  
The card in slot A cannot be used with this  
camcorder.  
1) (B) for the card in slot B  
2) B for a HDD connected to slot B  
Operation Warnings  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Use and storage locations  
Important Notes on  
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or  
storing the camcorder in the following places.  
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature  
range: 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F))  
• Remember that in summer in warm climates the  
temperature inside a car with the windows  
closed can easily exceed 50°C (122°F).  
• In damp or dusty locations  
• Locations where the camcorder may be exposed  
to rain  
• Locations subject to violent vibration  
• Near strong magnetic fields  
Operation  
Use and storage  
Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks  
• The internal mechanism may be damaged or the  
body warped.  
• If an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe  
is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe  
may be damaged. In such a case, stop using it  
and contact your dealer or a Sony service  
representative.  
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing  
strong electromagnetic fields.  
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for  
extended periods  
Do not cover the camcorder while operating  
Putting a cloth, for example, over the camcorder  
can cause excessive internal heat build-up.  
To prevent electromagnetic interference from  
portable communications devices  
The use of portable telephones and other  
communications devices near this camcorder can  
result in malfunctions and interference with audio  
and video signals.  
It is recommended that the portable  
communications devices near this camcorder be  
powered off.  
After use  
Always turn off the POWER switch.  
Before storing the camcorder for a long period  
Remove the battery pack.  
Shipping  
• Remove the media before transporting the  
camcorder.  
• If sending the camcorder by truck, ship, air or  
other transportation service, pack it in the  
shipping carton of the camcorder.  
Note on laser beams  
Laser beams may damage the CMOS image  
sensors.  
If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be  
careful not to let the laser beam be directed into  
the lens of the camcorder.  
Care of the camcorder  
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the  
lenses or optical filters using a blower.  
Fitting the zoom lens  
If the body of the camcorder is dirty, clean it with  
a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth  
steeped in a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry.  
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or  
thinners, as these may cause discoloration or  
other damage to the finish of the camcorder.  
It is important to fit the lens correctly, as  
otherwise damage may result. Be sure to refer to  
Viewfinder  
In the event of operating problems  
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece  
pointing directly at the sun.  
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays  
and melt the interior of the viewfinder.  
If you should experience problems with the  
camcorder, contact a Sony service representative.  
Important Notes on Operation  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About the LCD panels  
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured  
with high precision technology, giving a  
functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a  
very small proportion of pixels maybe “stuck”,  
either always off (black), always on (red, green,  
or blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long  
period of use, because of the physical  
characteristics of the liquid crystal display, such  
“stuck” pixels may appear spontaneously. These  
problems are not a malfunction. Note that any  
such problems have no effect on recorded data.  
In such cases, set the flicker-reduction function to  
auto mode (see page 123).  
If the frame rate selected for recording is close to  
the power-supply frequency, flicker may not be  
reduced sufficiently even if you activate the  
Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the  
electronic shutter.  
Phenomena specific to CMOS image  
sensors  
The following phenomena that may appear in  
images are specific to CMOS (Complementary  
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors.  
They do not indicate malfunctions.  
Focal plane  
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup  
elements (CMOS image sensors) for reading  
video signals, subjects that quickly move across  
the screen may appear slightly skewed.  
White flecks  
Flash band  
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced  
with high-precision technologies, fine white  
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare  
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. This is related  
to the principle of CMOS image sensors and is  
not a malfunction.  
The luminance at the top and bottom of the screen  
may change when shooting a flashlight beam or a  
light source that quickly flashes.  
You can use the supplied application software to  
correct clips that contain frames with flash bands.  
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the  
following cases:  
• when operating at a high environmental  
temperature  
• when you have raised the master gain  
(sensitivity)  
• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode  
The problem may be alleviated by executing  
automatic black balance adjustment.  
Note on data compatibility with other XDCAM EX-  
series products  
When you use a PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 to play  
materials recorded on the camcorder, any media  
in which clips of formats not supported by the  
PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 have been recorded  
cannot be used.  
The PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 cannot divide a clip  
recorded on this camcorder, even if the clip is in a  
video format supported by the PMW-EX1/EX3/  
EX30.  
Aliasing  
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they  
may appear jagged or flicker.  
Fragmentation  
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced  
properly, try formatting the recording medium.  
While repeating picture recording/playback with  
a certain recording medium for an extended  
period, files in the medium may be fragmented,  
disabling proper recording/storage. In such a  
case, make a backup of clips in the medium then  
perform formatting of the medium using  
OPERATION >Format Media (see page 95) in  
the setup menu.  
Flicker  
If recording is made under lighting produced by  
discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, or  
mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker,  
colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear  
distorted.  
Important Notes on Operation  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exchanging the Battery  
of the Internal Clock  
Specifications  
The camcorder’s internal clock is powered by a  
lithium battery. If the message “BackUp Battery  
End” appears in the viewfinder, this battery must  
be exchanged. Contact a Sony service  
representative.  
General  
Power requirements  
12 V DC (11 V to 17.0 V)  
Power consumption  
Approx. 17 W  
Main unit (camcorder) + LCD viewfinder + auto  
focus lens + microphone  
During recording, power source: battery pack  
Notes  
• Do not use a video light with power  
consumption of over 50 W.  
• When connecting a device to the DC OUT  
connector, use one with current consumption  
of 0.5 A or more.  
Operating temperature  
0ºC to 40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF)  
Storage temperature  
–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to 140ºF)  
Recording/playback formats  
Video  
HD HQ Mode: MPEG-2 MP@HL, 35 Mbps/  
VBR  
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,  
23.98P  
1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,  
23.98P  
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,  
23.98P  
HD SP Mode: MPEG-2 MP@H-14, 25 Mbps/  
CBR  
1440 × 1080 /59.94i, 50i  
(23.98P is converted to 59.94i in 2-3 pull-  
down processing.)  
SD Mode: DVCAM  
720 × 480/59.94i  
720 × 576/50i  
720 × 480/29.97P  
720 × 576/25P  
Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock / Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
         
Audio  
Minimum illumination  
0.05 lx (F1.6, +24 dB, 64-frame accumulation)  
Video S/N  
54 dB  
Horizontal resolution  
1000TV lines or more  
LPCM (16 bits, 48 kHz, HD: 4 channels, SD: 2  
channels)  
Recording/playback time  
With one SBP-8  
SP or DVCAM mode: Approx. 35 min.  
HQ mode: Approx. 25 min.  
With one SBP-16  
Gain  
–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24 dB, AGC  
Shutter speed  
59.94i/P, 50i/P: 1  
29.97P: 1 40 to 1  
2000 sec.  
33 to 1  
2000 sec.  
32 to 1  
2000 sec.  
SP or DVCAM mode: Approx. 70 min.  
HQ mode: Approx. 50 min.  
With one SBP-32 or SBS-32G1  
SP or DVCAM mode: Approx.140 min.  
HQ mode: Approx. 100 min.  
/
60 to 1  
/2000 sec.  
/
/
25P: 1  
/
/
23.94P: 1  
/
/
Note  
Slow shutter  
The actual recording/playback time may differ  
slightly from the values shown here, depending  
on usage conditions, memory characteristics,  
etc.  
2 to 8, 16, 32, 64 frames  
Audio Block  
Continuous operation time  
Sampling frequency  
48 kHz  
With the BP-GL95  
Approx. 330 min.  
Quantization  
16 bits  
Mass  
Main body only: 3.2 kg (7 lb 0.88 oz)  
Dimensions  
Headroom  
20 dB (the factory default setting)  
(20, 18, 16, 12 dB)  
Frequency response  
Supplied accessories  
MIC: 50 Hz to 20 kHz (within 3 dB)  
LINE: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (within 3 dB)  
WRR Analog: 50 Hz to 20 kHz (within 3 dB)  
WRR Digital: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (within 3 dB)  
Camera Block  
Pickup device  
Dynamic range  
90 dB (typical)  
Distortion  
0.08% max. (with input level 40dBu)  
Built-in speaker  
1/2-type, CMOS image sensor  
Effective picture elements:  
1920 (H) × 1080 (V)  
Format  
3-chip RGB  
Optical system  
F1.6 prism system  
ND filters  
Monaural  
Output: 300 mW  
Display  
1: Clear  
2: 1/4ND  
Viewfinder (supplied)  
3: 1  
4: 1  
/
16ND  
64ND  
Screen size  
/
8.8 cm diagonal (3.5-inch)  
Sensitivity  
F10 (System frequency: 59.94i)  
Aspect ratio  
16:9  
F11 (System frequency: 50i)  
(2000lx, 89.9% reflection)  
Picture elements  
640 (H) × 3 × 480 (V) Sequence delta  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
     
Others  
DC IN: XLR type, 4-pin, male  
11 to 17 V DC  
DC OUT: 4-pin  
Media Block  
Card slots  
Type: Express Card34  
11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated current:  
0.5 A  
Number of slots: 2  
Connector: Conforms to PCMCIA Express Card  
Standard  
LENS: 12-pin  
Supplying power to the lens  
11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated current:  
1.0 A  
Writing rate  
50 Mbps or more  
Reading rate  
REMOTE: 8-pin  
LIGHT: 2-pin  
50 Mbps or more  
USB: 4-pin  
i.LINK (HDV/DV): 6-pin, complies with  
IEEE1394  
Inputs/Outputs  
VF: 26-pin, rectangular, 20-pin round  
For wireless receiver: 15-pin, DSUB  
Input/Output connectors  
Signal inputs  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2: XLR type, 3-pin, female  
Lens Block (PMW-320K only)  
–60 dBu/–4 dBu (0 dBu=0.775 Vrms)  
MIC IN: XLR type, 5-pin, female  
–60 dBu  
Focal length  
5.8 mm (1/4 inches) to 93 mm (3 3  
(equivalent to 31.4 mm (1 1  
4 inches) to  
503 mm (19 7  
8 inches) on 35 mm  
(1 7  
16 inches) lens)  
/4 inches)  
GENLOCK IN: BNC type  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced  
TC IN: BNC type  
/
/
/
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ  
Zoom  
Signal outputs  
Servo/Manual selectable  
VIDEO OUT: BNC type  
HDMI: Type A, 19-pin  
HD/SD SDI OUT 1/2: BNC type  
AUDIO OUT: XLR type, 5-pin, male  
0 dBu  
Zoom ratio  
16×  
Maximum relative aperture  
1:1.9  
TC OUT: BNC type  
Iris  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
EARPHONE (minijack)  
Auto/Manual selectable  
F1.9 to F16 and C (close)  
Focus  
8 Ω, –to –18 dBs variable  
Auto/Manual selectable  
Ranges:  
800 mm (31 1  
50 mm (2 inches) to (Macro ON, Wide)  
Filter thread  
M82 mm, pitch 0.75 mm  
Macro  
ON/OFF switchable  
/2 inches) to (Macro OFF)  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
     
Media  
Supplied Accessories  
S×S Memory Card  
S×S PRO SBP-8 (8 GB)  
Viewfinder (1)  
S×S PRO SBP-16 (16 GB)  
S×S PRO SBP-32 (32 GB)  
S×S-1 SBS-32G1 (32 GB)  
Professional Harddisk Unit  
Shoulder strap (1)  
Stereo microphone (1)  
Windscreen (1)  
Cold shoe kit (1 set)  
PHU-60K/120K/120R  
Lens mount cap  
Media Adaptor  
Flange back adjustment chart  
Auto focus lens (supplied with the PMW-320K) (1)  
Operating Instructions  
Media AdaptorMEAD-MS01 (for “Memory  
Stick PRO-HG Duo HX” series)  
MEAD-SD01 (for SDHC card)  
English version (1)  
CD-ROM  
Mobile Storage Unit  
- Utility Software for Solid-State Memory  
Camcorder and Recorder (Application software,  
S×S Device Driver Software) (1)  
- Manuals for Solid-State Memory Camcorder  
(PDF Operating Instructions and Supplement)  
(1)  
PXU-MS240  
Audio equipment  
Microphone  
ECM-678/674/673/680S  
Microphone Holder  
CAC-12 compatible  
Wireless Microphone  
S×S Device Driver Software End-User License  
Agreement (1)  
DWR-S01D  
Recommended Additional  
Equipment  
WRR-855S/860A/861/862  
Other peripheral devices  
Power supply and related equipment  
Tripod adaptor  
AC Adaptor  
VCT-14/U14  
Video Light  
AC-DN10/DN2B  
Battery Pack  
Ultralight (Anton Bauer)  
Pad  
BP-GL95/GL65/L80S/L60S  
Battery Charger  
BC-L160/L500/L70  
CBK-SP01 DynaFit Shoulder Pad (soft type)  
Equipment for maintenance and easier handling  
Lens, Viewfinder and Related Equipment  
Hard Carrying Case  
LC-H300  
Lens  
1/2-type bayonet mount lenses only  
Soft Carrying Case  
LC-DS300SFT  
Viewfinder  
DXF-20W/51/C50W  
Viewfinder Rotation Bracket  
BKW-401  
Maintenance Manual  
Note  
The viewfinder able to use the BKW-401 is DXF-20W  
besides the supplied camcorder.  
Equipment for remote control  
Remote Control Unit  
RM-B150/B750  
Specifications  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dimensions  
(in mm (inches))  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
Notes  
Always make a test recording, and verify that it was  
recorded successfully.  
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES  
OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR  
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF  
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING  
MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR  
ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS  
TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.  
Always verify that the unit is operating properly  
before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR  
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE  
LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE  
PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT,  
EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD  
OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE  
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON  
WHATSOEVER.  
Specifications  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories  
HD monitor/SD monitor  
ECM-680S/678/  
674/673  
Microphone  
CAC-12  
Microphone Holder  
XDCAM HD series recorder  
PDW-F1600/HD1500, PDW-F75  
DXF-51  
Viewfinder  
HDCAM series recorder  
HDW-2000 series recorder, HDW-S280  
DXF-20W  
Viewfinder  
DXF-C50W  
Viewfinder  
WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner  
DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver  
SBP-8/16/32  
SBS-32G1  
S×S memory card  
PMW-320 a)  
MEAD-MS01, MEAD-SD01 Media Adaptor  
PXU-MS240 Mobile Storage Unit  
RM-B150/B750  
RCP-730/750/751/920/921  
MSU-900/950/700  
Remote Control Unit  
PHU-60K/120K/120R  
Professional Harddisk Unit  
VCT-14/U14  
Tripod adaptor  
Tripod  
BP-GL95/GL65/L80S/  
L60S  
Battery Pack  
BC-L70  
Battery  
Charger  
BC-L160  
Battery  
Charger  
LC-DS300 SFT b)  
Soft carrying case  
BC-L500 Battery  
Charger  
LC-H300  
Hard carrying case  
AC-DN10/DN2B  
AC Adaptor  
a) The PMW-320L requires a separately sold lens.  
b) The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted. However,  
remove them if they protrude more than 25 cm (9 7  
8 inches) from the front of the main unit.  
/
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
     
About data transfer speed of i.LINK  
About i.LINK  
i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of  
1)  
approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps that are  
described as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.  
For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer  
speed that the device supports is identified on  
“Specifications” page of the operating  
instructions supplied with the device or near its  
i.LINK connector.  
This section explains the specifications and  
features of i.LINK.  
1) When connecting with the device that support  
different data transfer speed, the actual data transfer  
speed may be different from those described on the  
i.LINK connectors.  
What is i.LINK?  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to  
integrate devices equipped with i.LINK  
connectors. i.LINK allows your device to:  
• Perform two-way transmission and reception of  
data such as digital audio and digital video  
signals.  
What is Mbps?  
Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at  
which data is transmitted per second. In case of  
100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be  
transmitted per second.  
• Control other i.LINK devices.  
• Easily connect multiple devices with a single  
i.LINK cable.  
Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting to a  
wide range of digital AV devices for data transfer  
and other operations.  
Other advantages include the following feature.  
When connected to multiple i.LINK devices,  
your i.LINK device can perform data transfer and  
other operations not only  
i.LINK operation with your camcorder  
For details on operation when other equipment  
with i.LINK (HDV or DV) connector is  
connected, see page 143.  
For details on connection with i.LINK cable and  
necessary software, refer to the operating  
instructions supplied with the connected device.  
with the directly connected devices but also with  
any of the devices that are connected to those  
devices. Therefore, you do not need to be  
concerned with device connection order.  
However, depending on the features and  
specifications of the connected devices, you may  
need to use certain functions differently, and you  
may not be able to transfer data or perform certain  
operations.  
About the required i.LINK cable  
Use the Sony 6-pin-to-4-pin or 6-pin-to-6-pin  
i.LINK cable to connect the i.LINK devices.  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 proposed by  
Sony, is a trademark supported by many  
companies worldwide.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by  
IEEE, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers, Inc.  
Note  
The camcorder can be connected to one device with the  
i.LINK cable (DV cable). When you connect with an  
HDV or DV device that has two or more i.LINK  
connectors, refer to the operating instructions supplied  
with the connected device.  
About i.LINK  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
MPEG-2 Video Patent  
Portfolio License  
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN  
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY  
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE  
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING  
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED  
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED  
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER  
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2  
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS  
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250  
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,  
COLORADO 80206.  
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage  
media storing MPEG-2 video information such as  
DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general  
consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the  
PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for  
their own business from MPEG LA. Please  
contact MPEG LA for any further information.  
MPEG LA. L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,  
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206  
http://www.mpegla.com  
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
 
C
Index  
Clip(s)  
A
Arrow buttons (K, k, J, j) 20  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4  
switches 21  
D
Audio level  
B
E
Battery  
Expand thumbnail screen  
Index  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
F
L
Lens  
Focus  
Lens file(s)  
G
M
Media  
H
I
Iris  
N
Index  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O
Scene files  
Search  
P
Power source voltage/battery remaining  
capacity 29  
Shot mark(s)  
R
Shutter  
Recording  
S
Index  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T
Thumbnail(s)  
W
X
U
Z
User setting data  
V
Index  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

SEP Lawn Mower BC901+1 User Manual
Snapper Snow Blower 555M 555M 15225 E15225 18245E E18245 860E 860M User Manual
Sony Car Stereo System D E20 User Manual
Sony MP3 Player ZS M7 User Manual
Sony Portable Stereo System 399 User Manual
Sony Projector VPL PX15 User Manual
Sony Stereo System CDP CX210 User Manual
Speco Technologies Security Camera CNC5915DNVW User Manual
Subaru Robin Power Products Welder EHO25A User Manual
Symphonic Griddle ZEKTOR MAS3 User Manual